Project Manual Muskogee Public School Server Safe Room & Remodel 1700 North Beacon
Muskogee Public Schools 202 West Broadway Muskogee, OK 74401
Architects
Engineers
11100 Stratford Drive, Suite A-100 Oklahoma City, OK 73120 Ph. 405.749.4642 x104 Fax.405.507.1657
[email protected]
3924 Hwy 71 North Alma, AR Ph. 479.430.7500 Fax.479.430.7502
[email protected]
May 2, 2014 Project Number: 85.01 Set Number: _________
ARCHITECTURAL PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Muskogee High School Server Safe Room & Remodel DIVISION 00 – BIDDING & CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS ******* 00100 00150 00200 * 00250 00300 00350 00375 00400 00450 00700 00800
Solicitation to Bid Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Noncollusion Affidavit Bid Affidavits Business Relationship Affidavit Performance Bond Statutory Bond Defect Bond Asbestos Awareness Notification Statement of Compliance (Felony & Sex Offenders) General Conditions Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 01027 01030 01300 01400 01450 01500 * 01600 01700
Summary of Work Application for Payment Alternates Submittals Quality Control Special Inspections Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Project Construction Sign Material and Equipment Contract Closeout
DIVISION 02 - SITEWORK 02070 02100 02211 02222 02223 02224 02225 02281 02520 02830 02930
ARCHITECT’S STAMP FOR DIVISIONS 00 THRU 14
DIVISIONS OTHER THAN THOSE NOTED ARE PREPARED BY CONSULTANTS
Demolition Site Preparation Rough Grading Site Excavation Backfilling Soils Report (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) - NOT UNDER ARCHITECT’S STAMP Trenching Termite Control Portland Cement Concrete Paving Chain Link Fencing Lawn Sod
INDEX PAGE 1
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Form Work 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03346 Concrete Floor Finishing DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200B Unit Masonry (Block) DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05300 Metal Decking 05400 Cold Rolled Metal Framing DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 06114
Rough Carpentry Wood Blocking and Curbing
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07181 Water Repellent Coating 07210 Insulation 07511 Built-Up Roofing 07600 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Steel Doors, Windows and Frames 08582 Service Window 08700 Hardware with Schedule 08740 Government Key Box 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09000 Color Selections 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09300 Ceramic Tile 09650 Rubber Base 09900 Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10270 Access Flooring 10426 Interior Signage 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Accessories 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13121WR
Pre-Engineered Wall, Roof and Gutter
INDEX PAGE 2
SOLICITATION TO BID Date: May 2, 2014 Project:
Muskogee Schools, Server Safe Room Project
Sealed proposals will be received by the Muskogee Public Schools at the Board Room at the Best Center at 202 West Broadway Ave. in Muskogee, OK, until 2:00 pm, May 27, 2014, for furnishing all labor and materials for the Server Safe Room Facility located at the School Maintenance Facility at 1700 North Beacon Shawnee in Muskogee as shown on the drawings and specifications. Bids received more than ninety-six (96) hours, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays before time set for opening bids, as well as bids received after time set for opening bids, will not be considered and will be returned unopened. The bids will be opened publicly. A pre-bid conference will be held at the site on May 21, 2014, at 2:00 PM. Documents packages will be available for digital download from the Oklahoma City office of Renaissance Architects (listed below). All Bidders must register with the Oklahoma City Office. Complete sets of the Drawings, Project Manual, and other Bidding Documents may be examined without charge from in the Architect’s offices at: Renaissance Architects + Engineers 11100 Stratford Drive, Suite A-100 230 West Okmulgee, Suite A Oklahoma City, OK 73120 Muskogee, Ok 74401 (405) 749-4642 (918) 682-5824 Or purchased at
Ridgeway’s (ARC Solutions) 7024 East 41st Street, Tulsa (918) 663- 8100
Triangle A&E 7201 N. Broadway, Oklahoma City, OK (405) 848-4661
Plans may be reviewed at: Southwest Construction News 7170 South Braden Ave., Tulsa Bid News/iSqFt 5727 South Garnett Road, Suite H, Tulsa Requests for CD disk of Bid documents to be mailed to interested bidders must be accompanied with a non-refundable check made out to the architect for $25.00 to cover postage and handling. Neither the Architect or Owner will be responsible for delays in delivery caused by the Postal Service or other carriers. A cashier’s check, certified check, or surety bond in amount of five percent (5%) of the bid shall accompany the sealed proposal of each bidder. Checks or surety bonds will be returned to unsuccessful bidders. No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of forty-five (45) days after bid opening date. The owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and waive any informalities. Mike Garde, Superintendent Muskogee Public Schools
SOL2BID PAGE 1
SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A.
BID FORMS Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the forms included in the Project Manual and in the quantity specified below. Seal proposals in an envelope and plainly mark the contents therein along with the name, address and phone number of the bidder. 1.
2.
3.
4. B.
Proposal: Proposal shall be authoritatively executed. Proposals carrying riders, alterations of construction time or qualifications which modify the amount of the Bid as submitted may be rejected as irregular. Incase of a difference between written words and figures in the Proposal, the amount stated in written words shall govern. Bid Bond: Each bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Bond pledging that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in his Bid and will furnish bonds as required for covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. A mandatory pre-bid conference for all contractors will be held at the offices at the project site on May 21, 2014 at 2:00pm There is no sales tax on this project. The Contractor will be provided a tax letter.
PROPOSAL PACKET: 1.
Submit Proposal Packet, with a sealed outer envelope, labeled as follows: BID DOCUMENTS Project: Server Safe Room & Remodel Muskogee Public Schools Muskogee, Oklahoma
Bidder's Name: 2.
Contents of Proposal packet: a. Proposal (1 copy) b. Bid Bond (1 copy) c. Affidavits (1 copy) each Non-Collusion Affidavit Business Relationship Affidavit Asbestos Awareness Notification Statement of Compliance (Felony & Sex Offenders) d. Worker’s Comp. Proof
1.02 A.
CONDITIONS RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION Bidders are required to inform themselves fully of conditions relating to construction and labor
SECTION 00100 PAGE 1
under which the work will be performed. Contractor shall employ such methods and means in carrying out of this work as will not cause any interruption or interference with Owner’s daily operations. B.
Examination of Premises: Before submitting proposal for this work, each bidder shall examine the premises, confirm all utility locations, sizes, pressures, etc., and satisfy himself as to existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate. Bidders may remove portions of ceiling tile to inspect existing conditions.
1.03
INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
A.
Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents. Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be made in writing by email or by telephone to: Robert Grounds Renaissance Architects + Engineers 11100 Stratford Drive, Suite A-100 Oklahoma City, OK 73120 405-749-4642 rgrounds@renarch,com
B.
Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum only. Information transmitted in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders shall not rely upon its accuracy.
C.
Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect before the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deletion, clarification or correction. Addenda will be issued to each Bidder receiving a complete set of Bidding Documents. Each Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of addenda on the Proposal.
D.
The Owner will not be responsible for any explanations or verbal interpretations of the Bidding Documents.
1.04
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.
B.
No substitution will be considered before receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days before the date for receipt of Bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of the proposed substitution shall be final.
C.
If the Architect approves any proposed substitution before receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth by Addenda. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.
SECTION 00100 PAGE 2
1.05
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
A.
Contract: The Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor will be written on the Standard AIA Form, Document A101.
B.
Bonds: Before execution of the Contract, the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded will be required to furnish the following bonds: 1. Performance Bond - 100% of Contract Amount 2. Statutory Bond - 100% of Contract Amount 3. One Year Defect Bond - 100% of Contract Amount Bonds shall be executed on forms identical to the form included in the Project Manual, Section 00600.
1.06 A.
B.
SOIL BORINGS AND SITE INVESTIGATION Bidders shall visit site and acquaint themselves with site conditions before bidding. Bidders may make their own investigations to satisfy themselves with site and subsurface conditions. Fill all excavated areas at conclusion of investigation. Soil boring information is attached. END OF SECTION
SECTION 00100 PAGE 3
SECTION 00150 BID FORM Date: May 20, 2014
Project Server Safe Room and Office Remodel Muskogee Public Schools Muskogee, Oklahoma The undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the "Bidder" declares that before preparing his Bid he visited the site, familiarized himself with all factors affecting the cost of the Work and carefully examined the Drawings and Project Manual for the Muskogee Public Schools hereinafter referred to as the "Owner" as prepared by Renaissance Architects+ Engineers LLC. BASE BID Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment, together with all other items of cost including insurance, and supervision, required for the work called for on the Drawings and in the Project Manual. BASE BID sum of: Dollars ($
)
ALTERNATE BID 1 (Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment, together with all other items of cost including insurance, and supervision, required for the work called for on the Drawings and in the Project Manual to add the Remodel work of the offices. Add sum of: Dollars ($
)
ALTERNATE BID 2 (Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment, together with all other items of cost including insurance, and supervision, required for the work called for on the Drawings and in the Project Manual to finish out the restrooms 112 & 113. Add sum of: Dollars ($
)
ALTERNATE BID 3 (Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment, together with all other items of cost including insurance, and supervision, required for the work called for on the Drawings and in the Project Manual to add the Emergency Generator. Add sum of: Dollars ($
BID FORM PAGE 1
)
Project will be completed as follows: ____________________ calendar days from notice to proceed. Bidder further agrees that the certified check, cashier's check or bidder's bond payable to the Owner accompanying this proposal, is to be left in escrow with the Owner, that its' amount of five percent (5%) of the bid figure is the measure, or portion of the measure, of liquidated damages which the Owner will sustain by the failure of the Bidder to execute and deliver the above named Agreement, bonds, and insurance and that if the Bidder defaults in executing such Agreement within ten (10) days of written notification of the award of the Contract to him, or defaults in furnishing the bonds and insurance within said ten (10) days, the Bid Security, as set forth in Oklahoma State Statutes, Title 61, shall be due and payable to the Owner. If the proposal is not accepted within Thirty (30) days of the time set for the submission of bids, or if the Bidder executes and delivers said agreement, bonds, and insurance, the check or bidder's bond shall be returned to him.
ADDENDUM RECEIPT: Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: ADDENDUM NO. ADDENDUM NO. ADDENDUM NO. ADDENDUM NO.
dated dated dated dated
Respectfully submitted.
Bidder By Title
Bidder's Address:
Telephone
BID FORM PAGE 2
SECTION 00200 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF COUNTY OF
, of lawful age, being first duly sworn, on oath says, that (s)he is the agent authorized by
, the
contractor herein, to submit the attached bid to the
.
Affiant further states that the said contractor has not paid given or donated or agreed to pay, give or donate to any officer or employee of the
any money or
thing of value, either directly or indirectly, for special consideration in the letting of a contract.
Subscribed and sworn to me this
day of
Notary Public
My commission expires:
Seal
SECTION 00200 PAGE 1
, 20
BID AFFIDAVITS
The following affidavits are to accompany the bid:
STATE OF COUNTY OF
) ) ss. )
Of lawful age, being first duly sworn, on oath says that (s)he is the agency authorized by the bidder to submit the attached bid. Affiant further states that the bidder has not been a party to any collusion among bidders in restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to bid at a fixed price in the prospective contract, or any other terms of said prospective contract; or in any discussions between bidders and any state official concerning exchange of money or other things of value for special consideration in the letting of a contract.
Contractor Subscribed and sworn to before me this .
day of
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
, 20
SECTION 00250 BUSINESS RELATIONSHIP AFFIDAVIT STATE OF OKLAHOMA COUNTY OF , of lawful age, being first duly sworn, on oath says that (s) he is the agent authorized by the bidder to submit the attached bid. Affiant further states that the nature of any partnership, joint venture, or other business relationship presently in effect or which existed within one (1) year prior to the date of this statement with the architect, engineer, or other party to the project is as follows:
Affiant further states that any such business relationship presently in effect or which existed within one (1) year prior to the date of this statement between any officer or director of the bidding company and any officer or director of the architectural or engineering firm or other party of the project is a follows:
Affiant further states that the names of all persons having any such business relationships and the positions they hold with their respective companies or firms are as follows:
(If none of the business relationships hereinabove mentioned exist, affiant should so state).
Subscribed and sworn to me this
Day of
Notary Public My commission expires:
Seal
SECTION 00250 PAGE 1
, 20
.
SECTION 00300 PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That
as Principal, and a corporation
organized under the laws of the State of Oklahoma, Surety, are hold and firmly bound unto in the penal sum of (State of Other Entity) dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and each of us, our heirs, executors, administrators, trustees, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that: WHEREAS, said Principal entered into a written Contract with
, (State or Other Entity)
dated
, 20
, for
all in compliance with the plans and specifications therefor, made a part of said Contract and on file in the office of
. (Name and address of Agency)
NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal shall, in all particulars, well, truly, faithfully perform and abide by said Contract and each and every covenant, condition, and part thereof and shall fulfill all obligations resting upon said Principal by the terms of said Contract and said specifications; and if said Principal shall protect and save harmless said . (State of other Entity) from any pecuniary loss resulting from the breach of any of the items, covenants and conditions of said Contract resting upon said Principal, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect.
SECTION 00300 PAGE 1
It is further expressly agreed and understood by the parties hereto that no changes or alterations in said Contract and no deviations from the plan or mode of procedure herein fixed shall have the effect of releasing the Sureties, or any of the, from the obligations of this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its duly authorized officers, and the said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporation seal to be hereunto affixed by its attorney-in-fact, duly authorized so to do, the day and year set forth below. DATED this
day of
PRINCIPAL:
By Title
ATTEST:
SURETY:
By Attorney-in-Fact
SECTION 00300 PAGE 2
, 20
.
SECTION 00350 STATUTORY BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That as Principal, and a corporation organized under the laws of the State of
and authorized to
transact business in the State of Oklahoma, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto in the penal sum of (State or Other Entity) dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and each of us, our heirs, executors, administrators, trustees, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that: WHEREAS, said Principal entered into a written Contract with (State or Other Entity) dated
, 20
, for
all in compliance with the plans and specifications therefor, made a part of said Contract and on file in the Office of (Name and Address of Agency) NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal shall fail or neglect to pay all indebtedness incurred by said Principal or subcontractors of said Principal who perform work in the performance of such contract, for labor and materials and repairs to and parts for equipment used and consumed in the performance of said contract after the same becomes due and payable, the person, firm, or corporation entitled thereto may sue and recover on this bond, the amount so due and unpaid. It is further expressly agreed and understood by the parties hereto that no changes or alterations in said Contract and no deviations from the plan or mode of procedure herein fixed shall have the effect of releasing the Sureties, or any of the, from the obligations of this Bond.
SECTION 00350 PAGE 1
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its duly authorized officers, and the said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporation seal to be hereunto affixed by its attorney-in-fact, duly authorized so to do, the day and year set forth below. DATED this
day of
PRINCIPAL:
By Title
ATTEST:
SURETY:
By Attorney-in-Fact
SECTION 00350 PAGE 2
, 20
.
SECTION 00375 DEFECT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That as Principal, and a corporation organized under the laws of the State of
and authorized to
transact business in the State of Oklahoma, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto in the penal sum of (State or Other Entity) dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States of America, said sum being equal to One Hundred Percent (100%) of the contract price, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and each of us, our heirs, executors, administrators, trustees, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that: WHEREAS, said Principal entered into a written Contract with (State or Other Entity) dated
, 20
, for
all in compliance with the plans and specifications therefor, made a part of said Contract and on file in the Office of (Name and Address of Agency) NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal shall pay or cause to be paid to (State or Other Entity) all damages, loss, and expense which may result by reason of defective materials and/or workmanship in connection with said work, occurring within a period of one (1) year from and after the acceptance of said project by ; (State or Other Entity) then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect.
SECTION 00375 PAGE 1
It is further expressly agreed and understood by the parties hereto that no changes or alterations in said Contract and no deviations from the plan or mode of procedure herein fixed shall have the effect of releasing the Sureties, or any of the, from the obligations of this Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed by its duly authorized officers, and the said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name and its corporation seal to be hereunto affixed by its attorney-in-fact, duly authorized so to do, the day and year set forth below. DATED this
day of
PRINCIPAL:
By Title
ATTEST:
SURETY:
By Attorney-in-Fact
SECTION 00375 PAGE 2
, 20
.
Section 00400 Asbestos Awareness notification
Contract Workers, Muskogee Public Schools have been inspected for asbestos under the A.H.E.R.A guidelines. Asbestos was found in select locations through-out the school. You are hereby notified that asbestos is hazardous to your health and must not be disturbed. Contact the Director of Maintenance and Facilities if any portion of the building or building material has potential of being disturbed during the process of your work. A copy of the Management Plan and instructions on the location and the proper techniques of handling are on file in the Office of the Director of Maintenance and on the M.P.S. Safety site. I agree not disturb any potential material with-out proper review of the asbestos management plan and proper notification of Director of Facilities. Company Name _______________________ Date of Activity _______________________ Signature of person performing work ________________________________________
MUSKOGEE PUBLIC SCHOOLS Important: Amended Law (S.B. 588) effective May 24, 1999 Section 00450
STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE (Regarding Prohibition of Felony & Sex Offenders on School Premises) According to the amended law, no person or business having a contract with the school district for services to be performed on school premises shall knowingly and willfully allow any employee to work on school premises if the employee is currently registered under the provisions of the Oklahoma Sex Offenders Registration Act*. This statement of compliance must be signed and returned before payment(s) can be made. S.B. 588, Section 1: I. It is unlawful for any person registered pursuant to the Oklahoma Sex Offenders Registration Act to work with or provide services to children or to work on school premises or for any person or business who offers or provides services to children or contracts for work to be performed on school premises to knowingly and willfully allow any employee to work with children or to work on school premises who is registered pursuant to the Oklahoma Sex Offenders Registration Act. Upon conviction for any violation of the provisions of this subsection, the violator shall be guilty of a misdemeanor punishable by a fine not to exceed One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00). In addition the violator may be liable for civil damages. II. A person or business who offers or provides services shall ensure compliance with subsection A of this section as provided by Section 6-101.48 of Title 70 of the Oklahoma Statutes.
Section 2: 1. No person or business having a contract with a school or school district to perform work on a full-time or part-time basis that would otherwise be performed by school district employees shall allow any employee to work on school premises if such employee is convicted in this state, the United States or another state of any felony offense unless ten (10) years has elapsed since the date of the criminal conviction or the employee has received a presidential or gubernatorial pardon for the criminal offense. 2. Every person or business performing services not subject to subsection A of this section on the property of a school or school district shall be required to sign a statement declaring that no employee working on school premises under the authority of such business is currently registered under the provisions of the Oklahoma Sex Offenders Registration Act and that the business is not in violation of the provisions of this section. Compliance with this statute shall be required of the person or private business, and there shall be no obligation placed upon a school district to ascertain the truthfulness of the affidavit. 3. A person or business having a written contract with a school or school district to perform work on a fulltime or part-time basis that would otherwise be performed by school district employees may conduct a felony search of the employees of the person or entity who would be assigned that work through a request to the State Board of Education in the same manner as a felony search is afforded school districts by Section 5-142 of Title 70 of the Oklahoma Statutes.
The undersigned is familiar with the facts stated above and agrees that this law will be observed. PERSON/BUSINESS NAME (type or print)
________________________________________
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE (type or print)
________________________________________
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE=S SIGNATURE
________________________________________
SOCIAL SECURITY # OR FEDERAL ID#
__________________________
_________
DATE
______________________________ ____ Return Statement of Compliance to: Accounts Payable Dept. Muskogee Public Schools
202 West Broadway Muskogee, OK 74401 FELONY A felony is a crime which is, or may be, punishable with death, by imprisonment in the penitentiary with or without post imprisonment supervision, by a sentence to community punishment, or by a fine. *OKLAHOMA SEX OFFENDERS REGISTRATION ACT The provisions of the Oklahoma Sex Offenders Registration Act apply to any person who, after November 1, 1989, has been convicted, whether upon a verdict or pleas of guilty or upon a plea of nolo contendere, or received a suspended sentence for a crime or an attempt to commit one of crimes listed below. The provisions of the Act apply to anyone who enters Oklahoma after November 1, 1989, and who has been convicted or received a suspended sentence for a crime or attempted crime, which, if attempted in this state, would be a crime or an attempt to commit a crime provided for in any of said laws. In addition, the provisions of the Act apply to anyone who enters Oklahoma after September 1, 1993, and who has received a deferred judgment for a crime or attempted crime, which if committed or attempted in this state, would be a crime or an attempt to commit one of the crimes listed below. 1. Abuse or neglect of a child if that crime involves either sexual abuse or sexual exploitation. i. Sexual Abuse includes, but is not limited to, rape, incest, and lewd or indecent acts or proposals, by a person responsible for the child=s health or welfare. ii.
Sexual Exploitation includes, but is not limited to, allowing, permitting, or encouraging a child to engage in prostitution by a person responsible for the child=s health or welfare or allowing, permitting, or encouraging, or engaging in the lewd, obscene, or pornographic photographing, filming, or depicting of a child in those acts by a person responsible for the child=s health or welfare. 2. Kidnapping - without lawful authority, forcibly seizing and confining another, or to lure, entice, or lead astray, by false representation or promises, or other deceitful means or to cause another to be sent out of state against their will. 3. Trafficking in Children. 4. Incest. 5. Forcible Sodomy. 6. Child Stealing. 7. Indecent exhibitions - procuring, counseling, or assisting any person to expose such person, or to make any other exhibition of such person to public view or to the view of any number of persons for the purpose of sexual stimulation of the viewer. 8. Obscene or Indecent Writings - writing, composing, stereotyping, printing, photographing, designing, copying, drawing, engraving, painting, molding, cutting or otherwise preparing, publishing, selling, distributing, keeping for sale, or exhibiting any obscene or indecent writing, paper, book, picture, photograph, motion picture, figure, for of any description or any type of obscene material. 9. Making, prearranging, cutting, selling, giving, loaning, distributing, keeping for sale, or exhibiting any disc record, metal, plastic, or wax, wire or tape recording, or any type of obscene material or any other kind of sound recording of any obscene or indecent language, poetry, or songs, or speaking any words by means of a telephone to any person which are offensive to decency or are calculated to excite vicious or lewd thoughts or acts or speaking any other communicable words which are offensive to decency or are adapted to excite vicious or lewd thoughts or acts. 10. Solicitation of Minors - willfully soliciting or aiding a child to perform or show, exhibit, loan or distribute to a minor child any obscene or indecent writing, paper, book, picture, photograph, motion picture, figure, or form of any description or any type of obscene material for the purpose of inducing any minor to participate in any act described in 7, 8, or 9. 11. Procuring or causing participation of a minor, under the age of 18, in any film, motion picture, videotape, photograph, negative, slide, drawing, painting, play, performance or any type of obscene material wherein the minor child is engaged in or portrayed, depicted, or represented as engaging in any act of sexual intercourse.
12. Any parent, guardian, or individual having custody of a minor who allows the minor to participate in any act specified in 11. 13. Facilitating, encouraging, offering or soliciting sexual conduct with a minor. 14. Showing acts of sexual intercourse or unnatural copulation. 15. Procuring child under eighteen years of age for prostitution, lewdness or other indecent act. 16. Inducing, keeping, detaining, or restraining a child, under eighteen years of age for prostitution. 17. Rape by instrumentation. 18. Rape in the first or second degree. 19. Lewd or indecent proposals or acts as to a child under sixteen
SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The provisions of AIA Document A201, “GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, 2007" shall apply to this project, except as hereinafter amended or altered in Section 00800. Copies of this AIA Document are available for review at the Architect’s Office.
SECTION 00700 PAGE 1
SECTION 0800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The following modify, change, delete from or add to the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. Where any Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause is modified or deleted by these Supplementary General Conditions, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR Add the following Clauses to subparagraph 3.2.1: 3.2.1.1 Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered in the Contract Documents which are reported to the Architect before 10 days of bid date shall be corrected by addenda issued by the Architect. If Contractor does not notify Architect of any such conditions it will be assumed all items of work and materials have been included in his bid. Add the following paragraph: 3.19.1 SITE MEASUREMENTS 3.19.1 The Contractor shall field verify measurements of existing conditions at the site and shall be responsible for their correctness. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and the indicated on the drawings. Difference found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 3.19.2 The Contractor shall furnish engineering and layout services necessary to provide required lines and grade for the proper execution of the work. ARTICLE 4.1 - ARCHITECT Add the following subparagraph: 4.1.1.1 The Architect is Renaissance Architects + Engineers, LLC ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS Add the following paragraph and subparagraphs: 5.5
SUBCONTRACTOR COOPERATION AND COORDINATION
5.5.1
Subcontractors shall examine all Drawings and Project Manual for all work, whether for their specific work or the work of others.
5.5.2
Subcontractors shall cooperate with each other, correcting and coordinating their work in such manner not to delay or interfere with work of others.
SECTION 00800 PAGE 1
5.5.3
Each subcontractor shall report to the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Architect, all delays or difficulties encountered in the installation of his work which might prevent its prompt and proper installation or make it unsuitable to connect or to receive his work or the work of others. Failure to report shall constitute acceptance of the work of others as fit for the proper receipt of his work.
ARTICLE 8 - TIME Add the following paragraph: 8.4
Liquidated Damages: Owner and Contractor recognize that time is of the essence in this agreement, and the Owner will suffer loss if the work is not substantially complete within the time specified in Section 00150 Bid Form, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 8 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense (defined in article 6.5) and difficulties involved with the actual loss suffered by the Owner if the work is not substantially complete on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for expenses (but not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner $150.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 2.1 for substantial completion until the work is substantially complete.
8.5
Liquidated Damages (defined): Liquidated Damages cover the expenses occurred because but being able to use the work as intended. These expenses include, but not limited to, rental of temporary space, additional staffing, additional maintenance and janitorial staffing, transportation expenses due to relocation of events or activities, and postponement of events or activities resulting in loss of revenue.
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Delete subparagraph 9.3.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 9.3.1
On or before the 25th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment, 5 copies, Notarized, and corporate seal if applicable, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or the Architect may require, and reflecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. .1
Withholding of retainage (5% of the amount earned to date, except that any time the Contractor has completed in excess of 50% of the total contract amount the retainage shall be reduced to 5% - subject to approval of the Architect).
Add the following clause 9.6.1.1 to 9.6.1: 9.6.1.1 The Owner shall make payment within thirty (30) calendar days after the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment. Add the following paragraph: ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS Add the following clauses to 11.1.2: 11.1.2.1 The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits of liability, or greater if required by law.
SECTION 00800 PAGE 2
1.
GENERAL LIABILITY, including the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Comprehensive Form Premises - Operation Explosion and Collapse Hazard: (X & C as applicable) Underground Hazard (U as applicable) Products/Completed Operations Hazard: (To be maintained for "ONE YEAR", commencing with the issuance of the final Certificate of Payment.) f. Contractual Insurance: including specified provision Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18 indemnification. g. Broad Form Property Damage: h. Independent Contractors:
j. Personal Injury:
Limits of General Liability
Bodily Injury Property Damage Personal Injury 2.
Each OCCURRENCE
Aggregate
$500,000 $250,000 $500,000
$500,000 $250,000
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY, including the following: a. Comprehensive Form: b. Owned c. Hired d. Non-Owned Limits of Automobile Liability Each OCCURRENCE Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined $500,000
3.
WORKER"S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS" LIABILITY Limits of Workers' Comp. & Emp. Liability
a. State b. Employer's Liability 4.
STATUTORY $100,000 (each accident)
OTHER LIABILITY COVERAGE a. Aircraft liability (owned and non-owned) when applicable: $1,000,000 for one occupant including passenger hazard coverage b. Watercraft Liability (owned and non-owned) when applicable. c. Builder's Risk: "All Risk/Completed Value" type.
SECTION 00800 PAGE 3
5.
ADDITIONAL INSUREDS, AS THEIR INTERESTS MAY APPEAR. a. Owner: Muskogee Public Schools b. Architect: Renaissance Architects + Engineers, LLC
6.
CANCELLATION PROVISION Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing company will mail 30 days written notice to the Owner and Architect.
11.4
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
Delete paragraph 11.5 in its entirety and substitute the following: 11.4
BONDS
11.4.1 The Contractor shall provide Five (5) duplicate originals, complete with power-of-attorney attached showing the authority of the executing agent of the following bonds in such form as directed by the Owner, with surety being a duly authorized surety company satisfactory to the Owner and licensed to do business in Oklahoma: .1
Performance Bond: Written in an amount equal to one hundred (100%) percent of the Contract price and issued in favor of the Owner.
.2
Defect (Materials and Workmanship) Bond: Written in an amount equal to one hundred (100%) percent of the contract price, to protect the Owner against defective workmanship and materials for a period of two (2) years after final acceptance of the project.
END OF DOCUMENT
SECTION 00800 PAGE 4
SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A.
1.02 A. 1.03
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS/ REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED The Work of this Contract is comprised of a single story building addition and associated remodel spaces and site improvements as shown on the drawings.
CONTRACTS Construct the Work under a single "Stipulated Sum" Contract. WORK SEQUENCE
A.
Coordinate construction schedule and operations with the Architect.
B.
Project will be completed as follows:
1.04
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A.
Coordinate use of premises under direction of the Architect.
B.
Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of Products under this Contract, stored on the site.
C.
Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.
1.05 A.
OWNER OCCUPANCY Owner will occupy the premises during the entire period of construction. Cooperate with the owner in all construction operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate and insure the least inconvenience to the general public and the school.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01010 PAGE 1
SECTION 01027 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A.
1.02
REQUIREMENT INCLUDED Submit Applications for Payment to owner in accord with the schedule established by Conditions of the Contract and Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittal: Schedule of Values.
B.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout:
1.03
FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
A.
Submit itemized applications typed on AIA Document G, Application and Certificate for Payment, and itemized data on continuation sheets G702A.
B.
Submit applications in the form required by Owner, in accord with the example bound into this Project Manual.
1.04 A.
PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT Application form: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Continuation Sheets: 1. 2. 3.
1.05 A.
Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed before date of submittal of application. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of contract firm.
Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored. Round off values to nearest dollar. List each Change Order executed before date of submission at the end of the continuation sheets. List by Change Order Number and description as for an original component item of work.
SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS When the Owner or the Architect requires substantiating data, submit suitable information, with a cover letter identifying: 1. 2. 3.
Project. Application number and date. Detailed list of enclosures.
SECTION 01027 PAGE 1
4.
For stored products: a. b.
B. 1.06 A.
1.07
Item number and identification as shown on application. Description of specified material
Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT Fill in Application Form as specified for progress payments. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A.
Submit Application for Payment to owner at the times stipulated in the Agreement.
B.
Number: three copies of each Application.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01027 PAGE 2
SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A.
SUMMARY Section includes: 1.
This Section identifies each Alternate by number, and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work, only when the Alternate is made a part of the Work by specific provisions in the Owner-Contractor Agreement or Change Order. a.
2.
Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner=s option. Alternate numbers do not necessarily describe the order by which Alternates will be chosen. The Owner will determine which Alternates, if any, shall be incorporated into the Work. a.
3.
1.02 A. B. 1.03
Indicate variation of Bid Price for described below and listed in Document - Bid Form. This document requests a Adifference@ in Bid Price by adding or deducting from the base bid price.
Alternate quotations, as proposed on Bid Documents, shall remain effective for 90 days beyond date of execution of Contract to permit Owner time to incorporate any Additional Alternates (not initially included in the Contract) listed herein, by subsequent Change Order.
Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the Work of each Alternate, to provide the complete construction required by Contract Documents.
RELATED SECTIONS Section 00003 -Bid Form Section 01300 - Submittal: Schedule of Values. SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES Add Alternate No. 1: Remodel existing adjacent building as shown in the construction documents. Add Alternate No. 2: Finish out rooms 112 and 113 as shown in the construction documents. Add Alternate No. 3: Add a 250 amp Emergency Generator as shown in the construction documents. Add Alternate No. 4: Add a 400 amp Emergency Generator as shown in the construction documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION
SECTION 01030 PAGE 1
SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A.
REQUIREMENT INCLUDED Procedures: 1.
2.
3.
Wherever possible throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined by manufacturer's name and catalog number, reference to recognized industry and government standards, or description of required attributes and performance. To ensure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for their review by the Architect. Make all submittal required by the Contract Documents and revise and resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements.
B.
Construction Progress Schedules.
C.
Schedule of Values.
D.
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions and Certificates.
1.02
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Individual requirements for submittal are described in pertinent sections of these specifications.
B.
Document 00300 - Bid Forms: Unit Prices.
C.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing Laboratory Reports.
D.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Substitutions and Product Options.
E.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents Operating and Maintenance Data, Warranties and Bonds.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Coordination of Submittal: Before each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted and verify that each item and the submittal for it conforms in respects with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Coordinate with other trades as required. By affixing the contractor's signature to each submittal, certify that this coordination has been performed.
B.
Grouping of Submittal: Unless otherwise specified, make all submittal in groups containing all associated items to ensure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. Partial submittal may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall be strictly liable for all delays so occasioned.
SECTION 01300 PAGE 1
C.
Timing: Make all submittal far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide all time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery.
D.
Notify Architect in writing, with submittal, of any deviations in submittal from Contract Document requirements.
E.
Do no fabrication or work which requires submittal until accepted by Architect.
1.04
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A.
Compile a complete and comprehensive schedule of all submittal anticipated to be made during progress of the work. Include a list of each type of item for which Contractor's drawings, show drawings, certificates of compliance, material samples, guarantees, or other types of submittal are required. Adhere to the schedule except when specifically otherwise permitted.
B.
Coordinate the schedule with all necessary subcontractors and materials suppliers to ensure their ability to adhere. Coordinate as required to ensure the grouping of submittal.
C.
Revise and update the schedule on a monthly basis to reflect conditions and sequences. Promptly submit revised schedules to Architect for review and comment.
1.05 A.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES Submit to Architect a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the work within ten days after Award of Contract. Upon Architect's request, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. 1.
2. 3.
4.
Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. Follow the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items. Identify each item with the number of the respective Section of the Specifications. For the various portions of the Work, each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's profit and overhead. For items that are stored materials (at the site), break down the value into: a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, state taxes are exempt. b. The total installed value. Submit a sub-schedule for each separate state of work specified in Section 01010 Summary of Work.
B.
The sum of the values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum.
C.
Sub-Schedule of Unit Material Values 1.
Submit a sub-schedule of unit costs and quantities for: a. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products (stored on site). b. Products listed on the original bid form under Unit Prices.
SECTION 01300 PAGE 2
2. 3.
4.
1.06 A.
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Shop Drawings: 1.
B.
C.
The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into: a. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid. b. Installation costs, including Contractor's overhead and profit. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values.
Present in clear and thorough manner, with details referenced to sheet, detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
Product Data: 1.
Preparation: Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. Show performance characteristics and capacities, dimensions and clearances required, and wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
2.
Modify Manufacturer's standard drawings, diagrams and literature to delete information not applicable to work and supplement information specifically applicable to the work.
Samples: 1.
Office Samples: Provide in quantity and size directed, complete with integrally related parts and attachments devices, and illustrating functional characteristics of product and full range of color, texture and pattern.
D.
Make submittal promptly and in such sequence as to cause no delay in work.
E.
Submission Requirements: 1.
Quantity Required: a. Shop Drawings: Five (5) opaque reproductions, except prepare four (4) indexed brochures and Mechanical and Electrical submittal (Manufacturers and Drawings). b.
2.
Product Data: Number of copies required by Contractor, plus 2 to be retained by Architect. Complete catalogs will not be acceptable. Manufacturer's regular catalog sheets will be acceptable if they indicate completely all specifications requirements. When Manufacturer's sheets are submitted, material not directly connected with subject shall be completely lined out. Where drawings cover several sizes or types of construction, they shall clearly indicate size or type of construction to be used, including a schedule identifying each piece of equipment. Sheets of submittal containing more than five different items of equipment shall be assembled in an indexed brochure.
Submittal Contents: a. Submission data and dates of any previous submissions. b. Project Title and Number. c. Names of Contractor, Supplier and Manufacturer.
SECTION 01300 PAGE 3
d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
F.
Resubmission Requirements: 1. 2. 3.
G.
2.
A. 1.08 A. 1.09 A.
Make corrections or changes required by Architect and resubmit until accepted. Shop drawings and Product Data: Revise and resubmit as specified for initial submittal; indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by Architect. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
Distribution: 1.
1.07
Identification of product, with specifications section number. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. Applicable standards, such as ASTM, Federal Spec Numbers, etc. Relation to adjacent or critical features of work or materials. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. Identification of revisions and resubmittals. Contractor certification of submittal review, to include product verification, field measurements, quantities, coordination with adjacent equipment structural members, or architectural features, and coordination of information within submittal with requirements of work and Contract Documents. Certification may be by stamp of approval or a letter of transmittal containing a statement to the effect that they have been reviewed. Uncertified submittal will be rejected.
Distribute reproductions of shop drawings and product data which carry Architect stamp of approval to job site and record documents file, other affected contractors, subcontractors, and supplier or fabricator. Distribute samples with Architect stamp of approval as directed by Architect.
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS Submit in accordance with Section 01600. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES Submit certificates in accordance with requirements of each specification section. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Submit in accordance with Section01700.
PART 2
PRODUCTS NOT USED
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL PROCEDURES
A.
Deliver submittal to Architect: Renaissance Architects + Engineers, LLC
B.
Transmit each item under AIA Form 810 or Contractor's Standard Letter of Transmittal. Identify project, contractor, subcontractor, major supplier, pertinent drawing sheet and detailed number and specification section number as appropriate. Identify deviations from Contract Documents.
SECTION 01300 PAGE 4
C.
Submit initial progress and submittal schedules within 15 days after execution of Contract and schedule of values with first application for payment. Update with each Application for Payment reflecting changes since previous submittal.
D.
Comply with progress schedule for submittal related to work progress.
E.
After Architect review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since previous submittal.
F.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittal to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
3.02 A.
ARCHITECT'S REVIEW Architect Duties: 1. 2. 3.
Review submittal with reasonable promptness. Affix stamp and initials or signature and indicate resubmittal requirements or approval of submittal. Return submittal to Contractor for distribution or for resubmission.
B.
Review by the Architect shall not be construed as a complete check, but only that the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors which may exist.
C.
Authority to Proceed: The notations "Approved" or "Approved as Corrected" authorize the Contractor to proceed with fabrication, purchase, or both, of the items as noted subject to the revisions required by the Architect's review comments.
D.
Revisions: Make only those revisions directed or approved by the Architect.
E.
Revisions After Approval: When a submittal has been reviewed by the Architect, resubmittal for substitution of material or equipment will not be considered unless accompanied by an acceptable explanation as to why the substitution is necessary.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01300 PAGE 5
SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY
A.
General Quality Control: Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship to produce work of specified quality.
B.
Work and Services covering quality control: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.02 A. 1.03
Workmanship. Manufacturer's Instructions. Manufacturer's Certificates. Mockups. Manufacturer's Field Services. Testing Laboratory Services.
Document 00700 - General Conditions: Inspection and testing required by governing authorities. Section 01300 - Submittal: Submittal of Manufacturer's Instructions. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and testing required, and standards for testing.
SUBMITTAL Before start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address and telephone no. WORKMANSHIP
A.
Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B.
Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
1.04 A.
1.05 A.
1.06 A.
MANUFACTURER'S' INSTRUCTIONS Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Should instruction conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES When required by individual specification section, submit manufacturer's certificates that products meet or exceed specified requirements. Coordinate with Section 01300. MOCKUPS When required by individual specification sections, erect complete full-scale mockup of assembly at project site. Remove mockup at completion when approved by Architect.
SECTION 01400 PAGE 1
1.07
MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A.
When specified in respective Specification sections, require supplier and manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment and test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to make appropriate recommendations.
B.
Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations.
1.08 A.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an Independent Testing Laboratory acceptable to Architect, to perform inspections, test and other services required by individual specification sections. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory ", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. Comply with requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740. Laboratory shall maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review services. Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located.
Extent of Laboratory Tests and Inspections: 1.
In addition to tests required by the following, Architect will recommend to Owner other type and number of tests to be performed on the project. a. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals required by public authorities having jurisdiction at project site. b.
Inspections and testing required in various specifications sections.
c.
Inspection and testing required by Owner or User Agency, if any.
d. 2. C.
Laboratory Responsibilities: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Additional inspections and testing requested by Architect and approved by Owner. Advise Contractor of number and type of test to be performed by Testing Laboratory.
Cooperate with Architect and Contractor; provide personnel after due notice. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of material and methods of construction in accordance with specified standards. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of Work or products. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect.
Laboratory reports: Promptly submit 5 copies of written report of each test and inspection to Architect. Each report shall include: 1. 2.
Date issued. Project Title and Number.
SECTION 01400 PAGE 2
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. E.
Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority: 1.
F.
Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Date and time of sampling or inspection. Record of temperature and weather conditions. Date of Test. Identification of product and specifications section. Location of sample or test in the Project. Type of inspection or test. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect.
Laboratory is not authorized to: Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents, approve or accept any portion of the Work, or perform any duties of the Contractor.
Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7. 8.
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and to Manufacturer's operations. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities or representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. Advise laboratory of identity of materials sources and which require testing. Advise laboratory of identity of materials sources and instruct suppliers to allow testing or inspections by laboratory. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. Furnish incidental labor and facilities; a. To provide access to Work to be tested. b. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. c. To facilitate inspections and tests. d. For storage and curing of test samples. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. Contractor shall be responsible to laboratory for charges due to failure to notify if requirements for testing are cancelled. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of cancellation of required testing operations. Contractor shall be responsible to laboratory for changes due to failure to notify if requirements for testing are cancelled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01400 PAGE 3
SECTION 01450 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A.
Each facility shall be designed and constructed in compliance with most currently adopted edition of International Building Code 2009, Chapter 17, Structural Tests and Inspections; Section 1704. Special Inspections requires that a special inspector inspect certain elements of the work. The owner will employ and pay for the services of independent individuals and/or firm, to perform special inspections on-site in compliance with the code.
B.
The Contractor shall coordinate and provide all necessary assistance to the special inspector in compliance with the inspections. The Contractor will notify the special inspector, a minimum of forty-eight hours prior to the inspection.
1.02
REPORT REQUIREMENTS BY THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR
A.
Special inspectors will record and maintain records of all inspections. Reports shall be furnished to the code official and the Architect.
B.
The special inspector will provide to the Contractor, code official, and Architect a report of all items not found not in compliance of the code and contract documents. A final report of inspections documenting completion of all required special inspections shall be submitted prior to the issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. Section 1704.1.2 outlines the records responsibility.
1.03 A.
REQUIRED INSPECTION Inspection of the contractor's fabricator(s):
B.
1.
Fabrication of structural load bearing members and assemblies performed on the premises of a fabricator's shop shall have special inspection (see exceptions).
2.
The special inspector will verify that the contractor's fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanship and the contractor's fabricator ability to gain compliance with the contract documents and referenced standards. The inspection will be examining the items for completeness and adequacy relative to the code requirements for the contractor's fabricator scope of work.
Exceptions to a special inspector at a fabrication shop:
1.
Special inspections are not required when the Contractor's fabricator has contracted an approved independent inspection or quality control agency to conduct periodic in-plant inspections at the fabricator's plant. Frequency of the inspection will assure that the
SECTION 01450 PAGE 1
contractor's fabricator conformance to the requirements of the inspection agency's approved quality control program. This program must be submitted to the special inspector for review.
2.
C.
D.
The Contractor's steel fabricator must submit a detailed procedure to the approved special inspector and code official for material control which demonstrates the fabricator's ability to maintain suitable records and procedures, such that, at any time during the fabrication process, the material specification, grade and mill test reports for the main stress-carrying elements and bolts can be determined. The steel products should not be incorporated into the work until acceptance of submitted procedure.
Exceptions to steel fabrication: Special inspection of steel fabrication process is not required when the contractor's fabricator does not perform the following:
1.
Welding.
2.
Thermal cutting.
3.
Heating operation of any kind as part of the fabrication process.
Inspections during construction: 1)
Metal structures: a. All main stress-carrying elements, welding material and bolting material shall conform to Table 1704.3 prior to erection. b. Special inspections are required for bolts, welding and details as specified below: 1) Installation of high strength bolts: Inspection shall be as specified in Section 8 of the AISC Specifications for Structural Joints Using A325 or A490 bolts listed in Appendix A. 2) Welding inspection shall be in compliance with Section 6 of SWS D1.1 listed in Appendix A. Weld inspectors shall be certified in accordance with AWS D1.1 listed in Appendix A. 3) The special inspector shall perform an inspection of the steel frame to verify compliance with the details shown on the approved drawings, such as bracing, stiffening, member locations and proper application of joint details at each connection. c. Concrete construction: 1) In the absence of sufficient data or documentation providing evidence of conformance to quality standards for materials in Chapter 3 of ACI 318 listed in
SECTION 01450 PAGE 2
Appendix A, testing shall be required of materials in accordance with the appropriate standards and criteria for the material in Chapter 3 of ACI 318. The testing of materials shall be performed by an independent testing lab. 2) The location and installation details of reinforcing and pre-stressing steel shall be inspected for compliance with the approved drawings, specifications and ACI 318 (as Section 7.4, 7.5, 7.6 and 7.7). 3) Forms for concrete, if used, shall be inspected for compliance with section 6.1of ACI 318 listed in Appendix A, and with any additional design requirements specified on the approved plans and specifications. Inspection of form removal and restoring shall be conducted to verify compliance with Section 6.2 of ACI 318. 4) During placing and curing of the concrete, the following special inspections shall be performed. a) Evaluation of concrete strength, except as exempted by section 1905.6.3.3 of the BOCA Code (ACI 318 section 5.6). b) Inspection for use of proper mix proportions and proper mix techniques (ACI 318, sections 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.8). c) Inspection during concrete placement, for proper application techniques (ACI 318, section 5.9 and 5.10). d) Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperatures and techniques. (ACI 3 I 8, sections 5.11, 5.12 and 5.13). 5) Exceptions to concrete construction: Special inspection shall not be required for the following: a) Concrete footings of buildings three stories or less in height which are fully supported on the earth or rock. b) Nonstructural concrete slabs supported directly on the ground, including prestressed slabs on grade, when the effective prestress in the concrete is less than 150 psi. c) Plain concrete foundation walls constructed in accordance with Table 1805.5(1), 1805.5(2), 1805.5(3) and 1805.5(4).
SECTION 01450 PAGE 3
E. Masonry construction: The following special inspections for masonry construction shall be as follows in accordance with ACI 530/ASCE 6: 1. Material (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, section 2.2). 2. Masonry strength (ACI 530.I/ASCE 6, 1.6). 3. Construction operations: a. Proportioning, mixing consistency of mortar and grout (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, section 2.6A). b. Application of mortar grout and masonry units (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, section 3.5). c. Condition, size, location and spacing of reinforcement (AC1 530/ASCE 6, section 1.12). d. Protection of masonry during cold weather, temperature below 40F; or hot weather, temperature above 90F (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 section 1.8).e. Anchorage (ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 sections 1.15.4 and 2.1.2). 4.
Exceptions to masonry construction: a. Special inspection shall not be required for foundation walls constructed in accordance with Table 1805.5(1), 1805.5(2), 1805.5(3) and 1805.5(4).
F.
Special cases: Special inspections shall be required for proposed work which is, in the opinion of the code official, unusual in its nature. The Contractor, Architect, and/or special inspector can bring any items to the attention of the code official that they feel might require special inspections. 1.
Construction of materials and systems which are alternatives to materials and systems prescribed by the International Building Code.
2.
Unusual design applications of materials described in the International Building Code.
3.
Materials and systems required to be installed in accordance with additional manufacturer's instructions that prescribe requirements not contained in the International Building Code or in standards referenced by the International Building Code.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01450 PAGE 4
SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A.
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED Construction facilities and temporary controls. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.02
Temporary Utilities: Electricity, Lighting, Water, Sanitary Facilities. Barriers and Enclosures: Barricades, Fences, Tree and Plant Protection. Temporary Controls: Construction cleaning. Project Identification and Signs Field Offices and Sheds.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01010 - Summary of Work; Work Sequence and Contractor use of premises.
B.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning.
1.03
ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING
A.
Connect to existing services, provide branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type power cords.
B.
Provide lighting for construction operations.
C.
Existing and permanent lighting may be used during construction. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs.
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
1.06 A.
1.07 A.
WATER Owner will pay cost of water used. SANITARY FACILITIES The Contractor may use the existing facilities as feasible. Coordinate placement of portable toilets with the Architect to avoid public view. BARRIERS Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas and to prevent existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK Provide temporary protection for existing construction.
SECTION 01500 PAGE 1
1.08
CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work the site, and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste material, rubbish and debris resulting from construction operations.
B.
Provide 0n-site containers for waste materials, debris and rubbish.
C.
Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site.
1.09 A.
1.10 A. 1.11 A.
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS Storage Sheds for Tools, Materials and Equipment may be provided by individual subcontractors and placed as directed by the Architect and coordinated with the Owner. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN See attached. REMOVAL Remove temporary materials, equipment, services and construction before substantial completion inspection 1.
Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or to original condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01500 PAGE 2
SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Transportation and Handling of Material and Equipment
B.
Storage and Protection of Material and Equipment
C.
Product Options and Substitutions
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
To the greatest extent possible, provide products, material and equipment to a singular generic kind and from a single source.
B.
Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor's selection of a product or material, select an option which is compatible with other products and material already selected. Total compatibility among options is not assured by limitations within contract documents, but must be provided by Contractor. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material selection.
1.03
PRODUCT
A.
Products include material, equipment and systems.
B.
Comply with specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.
C.
Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structures, except as specifically required or allowed by contract documents.
1.04
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Comply with industry standards except where more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B.
Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
1.05 A.
1.06
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION When work is specified to comply with manufacturer's instructions, submit and distribute copies to persons involved, and maintain one set in field office. TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging; maintain in a dry condition.
B.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage.
SECTION 01600 PAGE 1
C.
1.07
Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instruction, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperatures and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instruction.
B.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
C.
Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.
D.
After installation, protect products from damage from traffic and construction operations, including cutting and patching.
1.08 A.
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Requirements Included 1. 2.
3.
B.
Products List 1. 2.
C.
The contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes and performance, shall require approval by the Architect before being incorporated into the work. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless substitution has been specifically approved for this work by the Architect.
At the time of execution of the Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of complete list of major products which are proposed for installation. Tabulate products by specification section number and title.
Contractor's Options 1. 2. 3.
4.
For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer, select any one of products and manufacturers named which complies with specifications. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers and stating "or equal" "or equal as approved by the Architect" or "approved substitute", etc., in the Contract Documents, do not assume that material, equipment or methods will be approved by the Architect. Submit a request as for substitutions for this work product or manufacturer which is not specifically named. The decision of the Architect shall be final. For products specified by name, only one product and manufacturer, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed.
SECTION 01600 PAGE 2
D.
Substitutions 1.
2. 3.
Within a period of 30 days after execution of the Contract, or before, Architect will consider formal request from the Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified. After end of that period, requests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond the control of Contractor. Submit separate request for each substitution on form provided at end of Section. Support each request with: a.
4.
Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents, product identification, including manufacturer's name and address, manufacturer's literature, product description, reference standards, performance and test date, samples as applicable, name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation. b. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; list significant variations. c. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. d. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts. e. List of changes required in other work or products. f. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified. g. Amount of net charge to Contract Sum. h. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials. Substitutions will not be considered by acceptance when: a.
5. 6. E.
They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from contractor. b. They are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier. c. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of Architect. Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions.
Architect Duties 1. 2.
Review Contractor's request for substitutions with reasonable promptness. Notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01600 PAGE 3
SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A.
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for Final Acceptance including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Substantial and Final Completion. Reinspection Fees. Closeout Submittals. Adjustment of Accounts. Application for Final Payment.
B.
Final Cleaning: Execute cleaning at completion of the work as required by General Conditions.
C.
Project Record Documents: Maintain at site for Owner one record copy of: 1. 2 3. 4. 5.
D.
Operating and Maintenance Data: Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. 1. 2.
E.
1.02
Drawings, Project Manual and Addenda Change Orders and other Modifications to Contract Architect Field Orders or Written instructions Approved shop drawings, product data and samples Field test records
Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems.
Warranties and Bonds: Compile specified warranties, guarantees, bonds and specified service and maintenance contracts. Co-execute submittals, when so specified. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals and additional administrative requirements.
B.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Cleaning during construction.
C.
Respective Sections of Specifications: 1. 2.
Closeout Submittals for Work of the Section Cleaning for specific products or Work
SECTION 01700 PAGE 1
1.03
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
When Contractor considers the work (or designated portion thereof) is substantially complete, submit written notice with list of items to be completed or corrected.
B.
Within a reasonable time, Architect will inspect to determine status of completion. Should Architect determine work is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify Contractor giving the reasons.
C.
Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial completion and Architect will reinspect the work.
D.
When Architect determines that work is substantially complete, he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion per General Conditions.
1.04 A.
FINAL COMPLETION When Contractor considers work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Contract Documents have been reviewed. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative and are operational. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
B.
Architect will inspect to verify status of completion with reasonable promptness. Should Architect consider that Work is incomplete or defective, he will promptly notify Contractor listing incomplete or defective work.
C.
Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy deficiencies and send a second written certification that Work is complete and Architect will reinspect the work.
D.
When Architect finds Work is acceptable, he will consider closeout submittals.
1.05 A.
1.06
REINSPECTION FEES Should Architect perform reinspection due to failure of Work to comply with claims made by the Contractor, Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services and deduct the amount of such compensation from final payment of the contractor. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.
B.
Project Record Documents: At contract closeout, deliver record documents to Architect for the Owner. 1.
Accompanying submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing Date, Project Title and Number, Contractor's Name and Address, Title and Number of each Record Document, Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
SECTION 01700 PAGE 2
C.
Operation and Maintenance Date, Instruction to Owner's Personnel
D.
Warranties and Bonds.
E.
Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with General and Supplementary Conditions.
F.
Consent of Surety to Final Payment
G.
Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: In accordance with Supplementary Conditions.
1.07 A.
ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS Submit final statement of accounting, reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
1.08 A.
Original Contract Sum. Additions and deductions resulting from: Previous Change Orders, Bonuses, Deductions for liquidated damages, deductions for reinspection payments, and other adjustments. Total Contract Sum as adjusted. Previous payments. Remaining Sum due.
Architect will issue a Final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum not previously made by Change Orders. APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT Submit Application for Final Payment in accordance with procedures and requirement in Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIAL FOR CLEANING
A.
Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces.
B.
Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned.
C.
Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.
B.
Remove grease, roofing mastic, adhesives and other foreign materials from sight-exposed exterior surfaces. Lease exterior surfaces in a clean condition, equal to that found at the start of work.
SECTION 01700 PAGE 3
C.
Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.
D.
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and antipollution laws.
3.02
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintenance of Documents: Store documents in Contractor's field offices.
B.
Recording: Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal work until required information is recorded. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction of:
C.
1. 2. 3. D.
Specifications: Legibly mark each Section to record: 1. 2.
3.03
Field changes of dimension and detail. Changes made by Field Order and Change Order. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of products and items of equipment actually installed. Changes made by Field Order and Change Order.
INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A.
Before final inspection or acceptance fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
B.
Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
3.04
WARRANTIES AND BONDS: SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submit warranties and bonds to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner.
B.
Assemble warranties, bond and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. 1. 2.
C.
Number: 2 each original signed copies required unless otherwise specified. Table of Contents: Neatly typed in orderly sequence.
Form of Submittals: 1. 2.
Format: 8 ½ x 11" punch sheets for standard 3-ring binder. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. Identify each with typed or printed title 'WARRANTIES AND BONDS". Binders: Commercial quality, three-right with plastic covers.
SECTION 01700 PAGE 4
D.
Time of Submittals: 1.
Make submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion; before final request for payment. For items of Work where acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide undated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance at start of warranty period. END OF SECTION
SECTION 01700 PAGE 5
SECTION 02070 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Removal of existing building components and items.
B.
Removal of all trees in Project Area.
C.
Protect existing equipment to remain.
1.02 A. 1.03 A. 1.04
RELATED WORK Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable codes and governing authorities having jurisdiction, for disposal of debris. SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule in accordance with Section 01300.
B.
Submit coordination schedule for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required in accordance with Section 01300.
C.
Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01700.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A.
Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. 1.
Do not interrupt existing utilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Owner will provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities.
B.
Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain protected egress and access at all times.
C.
Provide & maintain temporary barriers, security devices, and totally enclosed sealed trash chutes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
PREPARATION
SECTION 02070 PAGE 1
A.
Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered.
B.
Owner will disconnect, remove, and cap disconnected utility services within demolition areas.
C.
Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents.
D.
Protect all existing surfaces and finishes, which are to remain, from damage.
3.02
EXECUTION
A.
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members.
B.
Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.
C.
Remove materials to be reinstalled or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect.
D.
Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered.
E.
Do not burn materials on site.
F.
Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas of work in clean condition.
3.03
DISPOSAL
A.
Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.
B.
Removal From Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable and excess materials from Owner's property and dispose of off-site, in accordance with Oklahoma Solid Waste Management Act.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02070 PAGE 2
SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
WORK INCLUDES Demolition and removal of surface and subsurface materials. RELATED WORK
A.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
B.
Section 02281 - Termite Control.
1.03 A. 1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable codes and governing authorities having jurisdiction, for disposal of debris. SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule in accordance with Section 01300.
B.
Submit coordination schedule for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required in accordance with Section 01300.
C.
Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01700.
1.05 A.
JOB CONDITIONS Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. 1.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A.
3.02
SITE CLEARING - GENERAL General: Remove paving, vegetation, improvements or obstructions interfering with installation of new construction. Remove such items elsewhere on site as specifically indicated or called for. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A.
Completely remove foundations, concrete slabs and other debris occurring in building area.
B.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inch loose depth and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. SECTION 02100 PAGE 1
3.03 A.
3.04
REMOVAL OF IMPROVEMENTS Remove above-grade and below-grade improvements necessary to permit construction and other work as indicated. DISPOSAL
A.
Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.
B.
Removal From Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable and excess topsoil from Owner's property and dispose of off-site, in accordance with Oklahoma Solid Waste Management Act.
3.05 A.
CLEARING Limits: Confine work to areas within grading and contract limit lines.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02100 PAGE 2
SECTION 02211 ROUGH GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Removal of topsoil and subsoil.
B.
Cutting, grading, filling and rough contouring the site.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing fill compaction.
B.
Section 02100 - Site Clearing.
C.
Section 02222 - Excavation: Building excavation.
C.
Section 02225 - Trenching and backfilling for utilities.
1.03 A. 1.04
REFERENCES ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provision of Section 01700.
B.
Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining, by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts and slope gradients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: Excavated material, graded, free of roots, rocks larger than 1 inch subsoil, debris and large weeds.
B.
Subsoil: Excavated material, graded, free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger than 3 inches and debris.
C.
Granular Fill: Type specified in Section 02211.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
B.
Identify known underground, above ground and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C.
Notify utility company to remove or relocate utilities. SECTION 02211 PAGE 1
D. E.
Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. Protect plant life, lawns and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
F.
Protect bench marks from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.
3.03
TOPSOIL EXCAVATION
A.
Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped or re-graded or marked areas.
B.
Stockpile in area designated on site.
C.
Do not excavate wet.
D.
Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet.
3.04
SUBSOIL EXCAVATION
A.
Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped or re-graded or marked areas.
B.
Stockpile in area designated on site.
C.
Do not excavate wet subsoil.
D.
Stockpile subsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet.
E.
When excavation through roots is necessary, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.
3.05
FILLING
A.
Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B.
Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, compacted to 95 percent.
C.
Subsoil and Topsoil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth, compacted to 95 percent.
D.
Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.
E.
Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft unless noted otherwise
F.
Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level area.
3.06 A.
TOLERANCES Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/12 foot.
SECTION 02211 PAGE 2
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 and with Section 01400.
C.
Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 and with Section 01400.
D.
If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02211 PAGE 3
SECTION 02222 SITE EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Excavation for building foundations.
B.
Excavation for slabs-on-grade, paving, landscaping.
C.
Excavation for site structures.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Inspection of bearing surfaces.
B.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. Dewatering excavations and water control.
C.
Section 02211 - Rough Grading: topsoil and subsoil removal from site surface.
D.
Section 02223 - Backfilling.
E.
Section 02225 - Trenching: Excavation for utility trenches.
1.03 A.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B.
Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C.
Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
D.
Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain
E.
Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
F.
Protect bench marks, designated existing structures from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
SECTION 02222 PAGE 1
3.02
EXCAVATION
A.
Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving and site structures according to directions in attached subsurface exploration report.
B.
Excavate to working elevations.
C.
Machine slope bank.
D.
Excavation cut not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundation.
E.
Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.
F.
Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
G.
Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume.
H.
Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work.
I.
Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost to Owner.
J.
Correct areas over-excavated by error.
K.
Stockpile excavated material in area designed on site.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.
3.04
PROTECTION
A.
Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavations.
B.
Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from freezing.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02222 PAGE 2
SECTION 02223 BACKFILLING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Building perimeter and site structure backfilling to Subgrade elevations.
B.
Site filling and backfilling.
C.
Fill under slabs-on-grade and paving.
D.
Consolidation and compaction.
E.
Fill for over-excavation.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control
B.
Section 02222 - Excavation
C.
Section 02225 - Trenching: Backfilling of utility trenches
D.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete materials.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B.
ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop.
C.
ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
D.
ANSI/ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures using 10 lb Rammer and 18 inch Drop.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Samples: Submit 10 lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory in air-tight containers.
SECTION 02223 PAGE 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
FILL MATERIALS
A.
All fill and back fill used on the site should be free of organic matter and debris.
B.
Contractor shall perform compaction tests according to the recommendation of the subsurface soils report bound in this manual. The architect shall be informed immediately of any deviation from the standards listed.
C.
Contractor shall refer to the subsurface soils report bound in this manual for fill materials and preparation.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify fill materials to be reused are acceptable.
B.
Verify foundation perimeter drainage installation has been inspected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Generally, compact Subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.
B.
Before placing new fill, scarify exposed Subgrade to a minimum depth of 9 inches and adjust the moisture content in the scarified zone to at lease the material's optimum moisture content determined in accordance with ASTM Specification D-698, the Standard Proctor Procedure.
C.
Prior to placement of aggregate base coarse material at paved areas, compact subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698.
3.03
BACKFILLING
A.
Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B.
Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy Subgrade surfaces.
C.
Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 9 inches compacted depth.
D.
Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation damp proofing, foundation waterproofing and utilities in trenches.
E.
Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
F.
Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not add fill against unsupported foundation walls.
G.
Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.
SECTION 02223 PAGE 2
H.
Slope grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
I.
Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
J.
Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill material.
3.04 A. 3.05
TOLERANCES Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 and Section 01400.
C.
Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 and Section 01400.
D.
If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
3.06
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Protect fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02223 PAGE 3
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT CENTRAL SERVER/SCHOOL SAFE ROOM 1700 BEACON STREET MUSKOGEE, OKLAHOMA
PROJECT NO. G2014008 March 21, 2014
This document was prepared for use only by the client, only for the purposes stated, and within a reasonable time from issuance. Non-commercial, educational, and scientific use of this report by regulatory agencies is regarded as a “fair use” and not a violation of copyright. Regulatory agencies may make additional copies of this document for internal use. Copies may also be made available to the public as required by law. The reprint must acknowledge the copyright and indicate that permission to reprint has been received.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page i of vi
4150 S. 100th E. Ave., Ste. 200-K, Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146
March 21, 2014 p: 918.622.7021
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1.
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................. 1 1.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................. 1 1.2 PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION ................................................................. 1
2.
SITE CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 3 2.1 SITE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................. 3 2.2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS .................................................................. 3 2.3 GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS ........................................................ 4
3.
ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION ........................................................................... 6 3.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................. 6 3.2 SITE DEVELOPMENT............................................................................... 6 3.2.1 Stripping .......................................................................................... 6 3.2.2 Existing/Possible Fill ....................................................................... 6 3.2.3 Existing Foundations ....................................................................... 7 3.2.4 Existing Utility Trenches and Proposed Utilities .............................. 7 3.2.5 Scarification, Moisture Conditioning and Compaction ..................... 7 3.2.6 Proofrolling ...................................................................................... 8 3.2.7 Construction Considerations ........................................................... 8 3.2.8 Perched Groundwater ..................................................................... 9 3.3 EXCAVATIONS ......................................................................................... 9 3.3.1 General ........................................................................................... 9 3.3.2 Foundation and Utility Excavations ................................................. 9 3.3.3 Excavation Slopes and Construction Considerations .................... 10 3.4 STRUCTURAL FILL ................................................................................ 10 3.5 BUILDING PAD PREPARATION ............................................................ 11 3.5.1 Lower Consistency/Density Soils .................................................. 11 3.5.2 Expansive Soils ............................................................................. 11 3.6 FOUNDATIONS ...................................................................................... 12 3.7 SETTLEMENTS ...................................................................................... 12 3.8 CONCRETE SLABS SUPPORTED ON-GRADE .................................... 13 3.9 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS AND CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATION ... 14 3.10 LANDSCAPING AND SITE GRADING CONSIDERATIONS .................. 15
4.
RECOMMENDATIONS ...................................................................................... 16 4.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 16 4.2 SITE PREPARATION .............................................................................. 16 4.3 STRUCTURAL FILL ................................................................................ 18 4.4 FOUNDATIONS ...................................................................................... 19 4.5 CONCRETE SLABS SUPPORTED ON-GRADE .................................... 20 4.6 EXCAVATIONS ....................................................................................... 21
5.
ADDITIONAL SERVICES .................................................................................. 22
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page iii of vi
4150 S. 100th E. Ave., Ste. 200-K, Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146
March 21, 2014 p: 918.622.7021
5.1 5.2 6.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS REVIEW .............................................. 22 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION AND TESTING................................ 22
LIMITATIONS..................................................................................................... 24
APPENDIX A Plate 1 – Site Vicinity Map Plate 2 – Boring Location Plan Subsurface Diagram Boring Logs APPENDIX B Laboratory Testing Program
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page iv of vi
4150 S. 100th E. Ave., Ste. 200-K, Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146
March 21, 2014 p: 918.622.7021
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT CENTRAL SERVER/SCHOOL SAFE ROOM 1700 BEACON STREET MUSKOGEE, OKLAHOMA GFAC ENGINEERING INC. PROJECT NO. G2014008 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Site: •
The project site is located at 1700 Beacon Street in Muskogee, Oklahoma. The ground surface at the project site is generally grass covered.
•
All fill to be utilized within the building pad shall consist of “non-expansive” structural fill.
•
Proofrolling of the exposed subgrade and proper compaction of fill is required to detect and correct unstable or undesirable material and create support for structural elements.
•
Based on lab testing performed, the lean and lean to fat clay soils encountered at the site are NOT suitable for use as “non-expansive” structural fill. In addition, it is recommended that the sandy silt soils encountered at the site NOT be utilized as “nonexpansive” structural fill within the building pad. These soils (minus deleterious material) are suitable for use as structural fill outside of the building pad.
•
A portion of the soils encountered at the site are sandy silt soils. These types of soils are highly moisture sensitive and may become unstable with minor variations in moisture content or when subjected to repeated construction traffic. It is recommended that the sandy silt soils be removed from the building footprint.
•
The subsurface conditions encountered across the entire site are favorable for the development of perched groundwater conditions. In a “perched’ groundwater condition, precipitation will infiltrate the upper lower plasticity more permeable soils and sit (perch) on the underlying less permeable clay soils and bedrock.
•
It has been assumed that cuts and fills of less than 2 feet will be required to achieve finished grades at the site.
Building: •
Soft/loose soils were encountered to an approximate depth of 2 feet below the existing ground surface elevation. Removal and replacement of these soft/loose soils is required to provide adequate and uniform support for the proposed structure.
•
The building pad should be undercut at least 24 inches below existing grade or 18 inches below the finish floor subgrade level, whichever extends to a lower level.
•
If not removed during initial undercutting, all existing fill shall be undercut full depth within the building footprint and replaced with structural fill.
•
The site is suitable for support of the building on a shallow foundation system bearing in controlled structural fill or suitable native soils.
•
The shallow foundation system for the proposed building bearing on controlled structural fill or suitable native soils can be proportioned based upon a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 psf.
•
A minimum of 18 inches of “non-expansive” structural fill material should be placed below the finish floor subgrade level.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page v of vi
4150 S. 100th E. Ave., Ste. 200-K, Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146
March 21, 2014 p: 918.622.7021
•
Undercutting and placement of “non-expansive” structural fill should extend a minimum of 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the building.
The information stated above is a brief summary of the recommendations presented within this report. The report should be reviewed in its entirety for proper implementation of the recommendations.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page vi of vi
4150 S. 100th E. Ave., Ste. 200-K, Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146
March 21, 2014 p: 918.622.7021
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT CENTRAL SERVER/SCHOOL SAFE ROOM 1700 BEACON STREET MUSKOGEE, OKLAHOMA 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
GENERAL
GFAC Engineering Inc. has completed the authorized geotechnical engineering evaluation for the Central Server/School Safe Room for Muskogee Public Schools located at 1700 Beacon Street in Muskogee, Oklahoma.
This report includes our
recommendations related to the geotechnical aspects of the project design and construction. Conclusions and recommendations presented in the report are based on the subsurface information encountered at the location of our exploration and the provisions
and
requirements
outlined
in
the
ADDITIONAL
SERVICES
and
LIMITATIONS sections of this report. 1.2
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
We understand the new safe room will be constructed at the Central Server building located at 1700 Beacon Street in Muskogee, Oklahoma. It is our understanding that the proposed building will be a single story structure and will have a footprint area of approximately 4,000 square feet. The proposed building is anticipated to be constructed of concrete blocks and steel bar joists with a metal rood and a slab-on-grade floor system. It is our understanding that this building will be connected to the existing metal building at the site.
Loading information was not provided at the time this report was prepared.
For the
purpose of this report, it has been assumed that maximum column loads will be on the order of 30 kips, maximum wall loads will be less the 4 kips per linear foot, and maximum floor loads will be less than 100 pounds per square foot (psf).
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 1 of 24
March 21, 2014
No information regarding finish grades at the site was available at the time this report was prepared. For the purpose of this report, we have assumed that minimal earthwork, i.e. maximum cuts and fills of less than 2 feet will be required at the site to achieve finish grades.
Recommendations related to pavements, retaining walls, retention/detention basins, and below grade structures are beyond the scope of services for this study.
The scope of the engineering evaluation for this study, as well as the conclusions and recommendations in this report, were based on our understanding of the project as described above. If pertinent details of the project have changed or otherwise differ from our descriptions, we must be notified and engaged to review the changes and modify our recommendations, if needed.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 2 of 24
March 21, 2014
2. SITE CONDITIONS
2.1
SITE DESCRIPTION
We understand the new safe room will be constructed at the Central Server building located at 1700 Beacon Street in Muskogee, Oklahoma. The proposed project location is indicated on Plate 1 included in APPENDIX A. The site is bordered by a metal building on the northwest, a grass pasture on the northeast and southeast, and a fenced gravel lot on the southwest. A few trees are located in the grass pasture area east of the proposed building location. The ground surface of the site is primarily grass covered with some scattered gravel. In general, the site slopes downward from the east to the west, towards the existing building. Minimal to no elevation differential was noted between the boring locations. Existing utilities in the vicinity of the site include, but most likely are not limited to, overhead electric, overhead phone, underground electric, underground phone, and buried cable line.
Additional utilities servicing the existing facility are likely to be
present. 2.2
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
The following presents a general summary of the major strata encountered at the project site during our subsurface exploration.
Specific subsurface conditions
encountered at the boring locations are presented on the respective logs in APPENDIX A. The stratification lines shown on the logs and section represent the approximate boundaries between material types; in situ, the transitions may vary or be gradual. Surficial Materials: Grass and approximately 3 to 4 inches of topsoil was encountered at the boring locations.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 3 of 24
March 21, 2014
Fill Materials:
Existing fill materials consisting of sandy silt and gravel was
encountered below the topsoil at the location of Boring B-02 and continued to an approximate depth of 1.1 feet. Native Soils: Native soils consisting of sandy silt, lean to fat clay with sand, and lean clay with sand were encountered beneath the surficial material and fill materials in the borings. The native soils extended to approximate depths ranging from 9.3 to 10.6 feet. Bedrock: Shale bedrock was encountered below the native clay soils and continued to the bottom of the borings at an approximate depth of 15 feet. Generally, the shale was soft and highly weathered to weathered. 2.3
GROUNDWATER OBSERVATIONS
Groundwater observations were made both during and after completion of drilling operations. The following table presents the observed groundwater levels within the borings at the time of the field exploration. TABLE 2.3 – GROUNDWATER LEVELS
Boring No.
Water Depth / Elevation During Drilling, feet
Water Depth / Elevation
B-01
Dry
Dry
B-02
Dry
Dry
End of Drilling, Feet
The materials encountered in the borings have a wide range of hydraulic conductivity and observations over an extended period of time may show the presence of groundwater.
Use of piezometers would be required to better define current
groundwater conditions and groundwater level fluctuations with time. Fluctuations of groundwater levels can occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff, and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. The possibility of
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 4 of 24
March 21, 2014
groundwater level fluctuations should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project. The subsurface conditions encountered across the entire site are favorable for the development of perched groundwater conditions.
In a “perched’ groundwater
condition, precipitation will infiltrate the upper lower plasticity/non plastic more permeable soils and sit (perch) on the underlying less permeable clay soils and bedrock. Generally, perched water is of limited volume and can be controlled with typical dewatering methods. However, it should be noted, that depending upon site grades, the subsurface stratigraphy, and the volume of water, more sophisticated dewatering methods/equipment may be required if a perched ground water condition is encountered at the time of construction. During wet seasons, the perched groundwater can cause the upper layers of soils to become soft and unstable.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 5 of 24
March 21, 2014
3. ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION
3.1
GENERAL
Based on the results of our evaluation, it is our professional opinion that the proposed project site could be developed for the proposed building using conventional grading and foundation construction techniques. 3.2
SITE DEVELOPMENT
3.2.1 Stripping Site development should commence with the stripping of any vegetation, organic soils, and associated root systems from planned construction areas. Care shall be taken to thoroughly remove all root systems from the construction areas. Materials disturbed during stripping operations should be stabilized in place or undercut and replaced with structural fill. 3.2.2 Existing/Possible Fill Existing fill materials consisting of combinations of sandy silt with gravel was encountered below the topsoil at the location of the Boring B-02 and continued to an approximate depth of 1.2 feet.
The existing fill material, minus any deleterious
materials, appears to be suitable for reuse as structural fill at the project site outside of the building area. Unsuitable existing fill material encountered during mass grading should be undercut full depth and be replaced with structural fill. Following the recommended undercutting operations for expansive soils (Section 3.5), all existing fill material remaining within the building footprint area, shall be undercut and replaced with structural fill.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 6 of 24
March 21, 2014
3.2.3 Existing Foundations At the location where the new building will be structurally connected to the existing building, it is recommended that test pits be excavated adjacent to the existing structure during initial site preparation to evaluate the depth and bearing materials of the existing foundations. Once the existing foundation bearing conditions are known, the contractor may need to design an underpinning and/or excavation shoring plan to protect the existing structure during excavation and construction of the proposed addition. GFAC Engineering Inc. should be provided the opportunity to review the proposed underpinning and/or shoring plans to assess their impact on the recommendations presented in this report. 3.2.4 Existing Utility Trenches and Proposed Utilities Existing utilities encountered during construction within the zone of influence of proposed construction areas should be relocated/abandoned as part of the site development. All existing utility lines within the proposed building footprint should be relocated to areas outside of the proposed construction.
Excavations created by
removal of the existing lines should be cut wide enough to allow for the use of heavy construction equipment to compact backfill. If the lines are to be left in place, thorough evaluation of the backfill will be required. All underground utility lines for the proposed project should be located outside the zone of influence of proposed foundations; that is a zone extending from the bottom edge of the footing at a slope of 1 Horizontal to 1 Vertical, 1(H):1(V). If utility lines are within the zone of influence of the foundations, settlements in excess of those presented in this report may occur. 3.2.5 Scarification, Moisture Conditioning and Compaction Following site stripping and required undercutting (see Section 3.5), the exposed subgrade should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted in preparation for fill placement.
Extremely wet or unstable areas that hamper compaction of the
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 7 of 24
March 21, 2014
subgrade may require undercutting and replacement with structural fill or discing and aeration may be required to lower moisture contents to levels that will allow proper compaction of the exposed grade. 3.2.6 Proofrolling Following moisture conditioning and prior to placement of structural fill, the exposed grade should be proofrolled. Proofrolling of the subgrade aids in identifying soft (lower consistency/loose) or disturbed areas. Unsuitable areas identified by the proofrolling operation should be: 1) undercut and replaced with structural fill, 2) scarify the upper portion of the subgrade, aerate, and recompact, 3) stabilized in place with shot/crushed rock with a maximum diameter of 6 inches, or 4) spanned through the use of bi-axial geogrid, depending upon the nature/location of the unstable/disturbed area. Proofrolling can be accomplished through use of a fully-loaded, tandem-axle dump truck or similar equipment providing an equivalent subgrade loading. 3.2.7 Construction Considerations A portion of the soils encountered at the site are clay sandy silt soils. These types of soils are highly moisture sensitive and may become unstable with minor variations in moisture content or when subjected to repeated construction traffic. If these soils are unstable at the time of construction, they will need to be undercut and replaced with structural fill, or be stabilized in place.
Close moisture control during compaction
operations will be required to reduce the potential for pumping of these soils. It should be noted that construction will be occurring near the existing building. Caution should be exercised during all phases of the construction, especially the earthwork phase to avoid impacting the existing foundations, foundation bearing materials, or the existing building. The depth of undercutting may need to be reduced to adjacent to the existing building to avoid undermining the existing footings.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 8 of 24
March 21, 2014
3.2.8 Perched Groundwater Though not encountered at the time of the subsurface exploration, the site is favorable for development of “perched” groundwater in the sandy silt material. Depending upon the amount of precipitation that falls prior to and during the construction of the proposed facility, a perched groundwater condition may develop. Depending upon the amount of perched groundwater present, the near surface soils could become soft and unstable with repetitive construction traffic. Typically, “perched” groundwater can be controlled with typical dewatering methods. 3.3
EXCAVATIONS
3.3.1 General All excavations must comply with applicable local, state and federal safety regulations. The responsibility for excavation safety and stability of temporary construction slopes lies solely with the contractor. We are providing this information below solely as a service to our client. Under no circumstances should this information provided be interpreted to mean that GFAC Engineering Inc. is assuming responsibility for construction site safety or the contractors activities, such responsibility is not being implied and should not be inferred. 3.3.2 Foundation and Utility Excavations It is anticipated that excavations for the proposed structure and shallow utilities will generally be in existing fill, newly placed structural fill and native soils above the groundwater level.
Excavations within these materials should be possible with
conventional excavation equipment.
Deeper excavations may extend into the
weathered shale and shale bedrock. The soil materials and the soft, weathered shale with a Standard Penetration Resistance (N) value of less than 25 blows per foot can generally be excavated with conventional heavy equipment such as backhoes, scrapers, loaders, etc. Excavation of harder, less weathered shale bedrock will most likely be difficult and may require the use of single-tooth rippers mounted on large
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 9 of 24
March 21, 2014
tractors such as a Caterpillar D-8 or larger, pneumatic breakers mounted on backhoes/trackhoes, or other rock excavating techniques to complete the excavations. Excavation of these materials in confined excavations may be difficult. 3.3.3 Excavation Slopes and Construction Considerations Excavations should be cut to a stable slope or be temporarily braced, depending upon the excavation depths and the subsurface conditions encountered.
Temporary
construction slopes should be designed in strict compliance with the most recent governing regulations. Stockpiles should be placed well away from the edge of the excavation and their heights should be controlled so they do not surcharge the sides of the excavation. Surface drainage should be carefully controlled to prevent flow of water into the excavations. Construction slopes should be closely observed for signs of mass movement: tension cracks near the crest, bulging at the toe, etc. If potential stability problems are observed, a geotechnical engineer should be immediately contacted. 3.4
STRUCTURAL FILL
Based on lab testing performed, the lean and lean to fat clay soils encountered at the site are NOT suitable for use as “non-expansive” structural fill. These soils (minus deleterious material) are suitable for use as structural fill outside of the building pad. Additional testing of the on-site soils at the time of construction should be performed prior to use as structural fill. It is recommended that the sandy silt soils encountered at the site NOT be utilized as “non-expansive” structural fill within the building pad. These soils could be utilized as structural fill outside of the building pad. Depending upon the final grades and depth of foundations at the project site, use of these soils could lead water migrating and collecting beneath the slab-on-grade. All imported material shall meet the requirements as outlined in Section 4.3.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 10 of 24
March 21, 2014
3.5
BUILDING PAD PREPARATION
Soft /loose soils and expansive clay soils are present at the project site within the building footprint area.
Both the soft soils and expansive clay soils need to be
addressed in order to provide adequate support for foundations, building floor slabs, and to limit differential movement due to expansive soils. 3.5.1 Lower Consistency/Density Soils Soft/loose soils were encountered to an approximate depth of 2 feet at the location of Boring B-01. Removal of these soft/loose soils is required to provide adequate and uniform support for the proposed structure.
It should be noted that these
soft/loose soils may extend to other areas of the site and to deeper depths than indicated in this report. The undercutting should extend a minimum of 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the building. Following the recommended undercutting, the exposed grade should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted to the requirements of structural fill. 3.5.2 Expansive Soils The active zone at the project site is on the order of 8 feet. The subsurface profile consists of lean clay and lean to fat clay soils with moderate swell potential.
The
calculated PVR within the building is on the order of approximately 1 inch based upon existing grades, and anticipated final grades at the site. A shallow grade supported foundation system may be considered at this site provided the building pad is prepared to reduce the potential for expansive soil movement. In order to limit differential movements due to swelling soils, a minimum of 18 inches of “non-expansive” structural fill should be placed below the finish floor subgrade level. The “non-expansive” structural fill should extend a minimum of 5 feet beyond the building
footprint
(where
feasible
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
due
existing
Page 11 of 24
building).
Following
the
March 21, 2014
recommendations presented in this section, potential expansive soil movement should be reduced to approximately 1 inch. This subgrade modification option is intended to reduce the swell potential to acceptable limits, allowing the use of a ground-supported floor system. However, be reminded that any ground-supported floor system is not as positive as a structurally suspended floor, and shallow structures over expansive soils will experience some movement over their design life. 3.6
FOUNDATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the site are suitable for support of the proposed structure on a shallow foundation system founded in controlled structural fill or suitable native clay soils. Care should be exercised during construction of foundations adjacent to the existing building to avoid possible influence on the existing structure. New foundations should be supported at the same level as the existing foundations, where possible. Foundations should be founded at a minimum depth of 2 feet below final subgrade levels. 3.7
SETTLEMENTS
It is anticipated that shallow foundations will be founded in controlled structural fill or suitable native clay soils. Settlement of the building foundations has been estimated to be approximately 1 inch. Differential settlements are anticipated to be approximately ½ of total settlement. The proposed building will be constructed adjacent to the existing structure. The type of foundation that the existing structure is founded on is unknown.
The proposed
foundations of the new structure will be in close proximity or adjacent to the existing foundations. Foundations that are constructed adjacent to the existing structure will increase the stresses on the bearing material of the existing structures. This increase in stress may result in additional settlement of the existing structure. The magnitude of the settlement cannot be determined without additional information. Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 12 of 24
March 21, 2014
The bearing elevation of the existing foundations should be determined prior to construction and provided to GFAC Engineering Inc. so that we can determine if modifications to our recommendations would be warranted. 3.8
CONCRETE SLABS SUPPORTED ON-GRADE
Recommendations outlined in Sections 4.2 and 4.3 of this report are intended to develop subgrades that are suitable for support of the building floor slabs.
These
recommendations include that all material imported to the project site meet the requirements outlined in Section 4.3.
It is recommended that the building pad be
undercut at least 24 inches below existing grade or 18 inches below the finish floor subgrade level, whichever extends to a lower level in order to limit the anticipated potential vertical movement of the slab on grade to less than 1 inch. Subsurface moisture and moisture vapor naturally migrate upward through the soil and, where the soil is covered by a building, this subsurface moisture will collect. To reduce the impact of this subsurface moisture and the potential impact of future induced moisture (such as landscape irrigation or precipitation) a vapor retarder is sometimes utilized below the compacted crushed limestone layer.
This membrane typically
consists of visquene or polyvinyl plastic sheeting. It should be noted that although vapor retarder systems are frequently utilized, this system may not be completely effective in preventing floor slab moisture problems. These systems will not necessarily assure that floor slab moisture transmission rates will meet floor covering manufacturer standards and that indoor humidity levels will be appropriate to inhibit mold growth. The design and construction of such systems are totally dependent on the proposed use and design of the proposed building and all elements of building design and function should be considered in the slab-on-grade floor design. Building design and construction may have a greater role in perceived moisture problems since sealed buildings/rooms or inadequate ventilation may produce excessive moisture in a building and affect indoor air quality.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 13 of 24
March 21, 2014
Various factors such as surface grades, adjacent planters, the quality of slab concrete and the permeability of the on-site soils affect slab moisture and can influence future floor and moisture conditions. In many cases, floor moisture problems are the result of either improper curing of floor slabs or improper application of floor adhesives. We recommend contacting a flooring consultant experienced in the area of concrete slabon-grade floors or the floor covering manufacturer for specific recommendations regarding your proposed flooring applications. Special precautions must be taken during the placement and curing of all concrete slabs.
Excessive slump (high water-cement ratio) of the concrete and/or improper
curing procedures used during either hot or cold weather conditions could lead to excessive shrinkage, cracking or curling of the slabs. High water-cement ratio and/or improper curing also greatly increase the water vapor permeability of the concrete. We recommend that all concrete placement and curing operations be performed in accordance with the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Manual. 3.9
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS AND CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATION
Weather conditions will influence the site preparation required. In spring and late fall, following periods of rainfall, the moisture content of the near-surface soils may be significantly above the optimum moisture content. Excessive moisture could seriously impede grading by causing an unstable subgrade condition. Typical remedial measures include aerating the wet subgrade, removal of the wet materials and replacing them with dry materials, reinforcing the subgrade with geotextiles/geogrid or applying lime, cement kiln dust (CKD), or Class “C” fly ash as a drying agent. If construction of the project is to be performed during winter months, appropriate steps should be taken to prevent the soils from freezing.
In no case should the fill,
foundations, or other exterior flat work be placed on or against frozen or partially frozen materials. Frozen materials shall be removed and replaced with a suitable material. Frozen materials shall not be included in any compacted fills.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 14 of 24
March 21, 2014
3.10 LANDSCAPING AND SITE GRADING CONSIDERATIONS Provisions should be made to reduce the potential for large moisture changes within building subgrade soils located adjacent to landscape areas, to reduce the potential for subgrade movement. Positive drainage away from the building should be incorporated into the design plans. Ponding of water adjacent to the building could contribute to significant moisture increases in the subgrade soils and subsequent heaving. Consideration should also be given to limiting landscaping and irrigation adjacent to the building. Trees and large bushes can develop intricate root systems that can draw moisture from the subgrade soils, causing them to shrink during dry periods of the year. Desiccation of soils below foundations can result in settlement of shallow foundations.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 15 of 24
March 21, 2014
4. RECOMMENDATIONS
4.1
GENERAL
Based on the results of our evaluation, it is our professional opinion that the proposed project site could be developed for the proposed building using conventional grading and foundation construction techniques.
Recommendations regarding geotechnical
aspects of the project design and construction are presented below. The recommendations submitted herein are based, in part, upon data obtained from our subsurface exploration. The nature and extent of subsurface variations that may exist at the proposed project site will not become evident until construction. If variations appear evident, then the recommendations presented in this report should be evaluated. In the event that any changes in the nature, design, location or depth of the proposed structure are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report will not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and our recommendations modified in writing. 4.2
SITE PREPARATION
We recommend the following for site preparation: 1. All vegetation and topsoil shall be stripped from the site. Care shall be taken to thoroughly remove all root systems. 2. The proposed building should be undercut at least 24 inches below existing grade or 18 inches below the finish floor subgrade level, whichever extends to a lower level. 3. At the location where the new building will be structurally connected to the existing building, it is recommended that test pits be excavated adjacent to the existing structure during initial site preparation to evaluate the depth and bearing
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 16 of 24
March 21, 2014
materials of the existing foundations, and determine how the recommended undercutting operations would impact existing foundations. 4. All soft/loose soils encountered within the building footprint area should be undercut full depth and replaced with structural fill.
Soft/loose soils were
encountered at the ground surface and continued to an approximate depth of 2 feet below the existing ground surface elevation in Boring B-01. 5. Following the recommended undercutting operation, all existing fill material remaining within the building footprint area, shall be undercut and replaced with structural fill. 6. A minimum of 18 inches of “non-expansive” structural fill should be placed beneath the proposed building finished floor slab subgrade elevation. 7. Undercutting and placement of “non-expansive” structural fill should extend a minimum of 5 feet beyond the building footprint area (where feasible due to existing structure). 8. Following stripping and required undercutting operations, the exposed subgrade should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted to a depth of 8 inches. 9. The exposed subgrade should be proofrolled with a fully loaded, tandem-axle dump truck. Unsuitable areas identified by the proofrolling operation should be: 1) undercut and replaced with structural fill, 2) scarify the upper portion of the subgrade, aerate, and recompact, 3) stabilized in place with shot/crushed rock with a maximum diameter of 6 inches, or 4) spanned through the use of bi-axial geogrid, depending upon the nature/location of the soft areas. The method in which unsuitable areas are corrected would depend upon the location of the unsuitable areas and the conditions encountered at the site at the time of construction.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 17 of 24
March 21, 2014
10. A portion of the near surface soils at the site consist of sandy silt. These soils are sensitive to fluctuations in moisture content and can become unstable with slight increases in moisture content. Depending upon the moisture content of these soils at/during the time of construction these materials may need to be stabilized in place, dried out, or undercut and replaced with structural fill. 4.3
STRUCTURAL FILL
We recommend the following for structural fill: 1. BUILDING PAD - All fill placed within the building footprint should consist of a “non-expansive” structural fill material with the following properties: a. Maximum Liquid Limit of 45 and a maximum Plasticity Index (PI) of 22. b. “Non-expansive” select fill material shall consist of approved materials, free of organic matter (organic content less than 4 percent) and debris. Approved materials are defined as those soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as CL, GC, SC, and SP. ON-SITE SOILS – Based on lab testing performed, the lean and lean to fat clay soils encountered at the site are NOT suitable for use as “non-expansive” structural fill. These soils (minus deleterious material) are suitable for use as structural fill outside of the building pad. Additional testing of the on-site soils at the time of construction should be performed prior to use as structural fill. It is recommended that the sandy silt soils encountered at the site NOT be utilized as “non-expansive” structural fill within the building pad. These soils could be utilized as structural fill outside of the building pad. 2. OTHER IMPORTED MATERIAL – We recommend the following criteria for imported materials to be used outside of the building area:
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 18 of 24
March 21, 2014
a. The material should consist of approved materials, free of organic matter (organic content less than 4 percent) and debris. Approved materials are defined as those soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as CL, CH, GC, SC, and SP. b. A maximum Liquid Limit of 50 and a maximum Plasticity Index (PI) of less than 30. 3. All fill material should have a maximum particle size of 3 inches. 4. All fill should be placed in lifts having a maximum loose lift thickness of 9 inches. 5. All fill shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the material's maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698, standard Proctor compaction. 6. The moisture content of the clay fill (Plasticity Index > 10) at the time of compaction should be within a range of 0 to 4 percent above optimum moisture content as defined by the standard Proctor compaction procedure. 7. For clay fills having lower plasticities (Plasticity Index < 10) and sand, it may be necessary to use a moisture range of 2 percent below to 2 percent above optimum moisture content. 4.4
FOUNDATIONS
Following the recommended site preparation, the building foundations would be supported on controlled structural fill or approved native soils. We recommend the following design criteria: 1. Building footings may be proportioned for a maximum allowable bearing pressure presented in the following table. The allowable bearing pressure is based on a minimum factor of safety of approximately three (3) with respect to shear failure of the foundation bearing materials. Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 19 of 24
March 21, 2014
Table 4.4 – Allowable Bearing Pressure
Allowable Bearing Pressure
Estimated Settlement
(psf)
(inches)
2,000
Less than 1
Bearing Material Controlled Structural Fill/Suitable Native Soils
2. Continuous wall footings should have a minimum width of 16 inches and isolated spread footings should have a minimum width of 24 inches. 3. The frost depth at the project site is approximately 22 inches. 4. The foundations should extend a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grades due to freeze/thaw and wetting/drying cycles. 5. New foundations adjacent to the existing structure should bear at the same elevation or slightly below the elevation of the existing foundations. 4.5
CONCRETE SLABS SUPPORTED ON-GRADE
Following the recommendations for site preparation, the site would be suitable for grade supported floor slabs.
We recommend the following provisions for design and
construction of the floor slab: 1. All material placed within the building footprint should meet the requirements of “non-expansive” structural fill. 2. All utility trench backfill and foundation backfill should be placed in accordance with the requirements of structural fill.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 20 of 24
March 21, 2014
3. A granular leveling course, having a minimum thickness of 4 inches, should be used below the building floor slab. The granular section provides a capillary moisture break and acts as a leveling course.
The granular leveling course
should consist of clean, crushed limestone gravel with a nominal size of ½ to ¾ inch. 4. A minimum of 18 inches of “non-expansive” structural fill should be placed below the finish floor subgrade level. 5. Immediately prior to construction of the building floor slab, it is recommended that the exposed subgrade be evaluated to determine whether moisture contents are within the recommended range and to identify areas disturbed by construction operations. Unsuitable or disturbed areas should be reworked prior to placement of the granular leveling course and construction of the floor slab. 4.6
EXCAVATIONS
All excavations and excavation retention systems are the sole responsibility of the Contractor and should be in accordance with Oklahoma State law, and design by a licensed professional engineer. Attention is drawn to OSHA Standards 29 CFR - 1926 Subpart P for guidance in the design of such systems.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 21 of 24
March 21, 2014
5. ADDITIONAL SERVICES
5.1
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS REVIEW
We recommend that GFAC Engineering Inc. conduct a general review of the final plans and specifications to evaluate that our earthwork and foundation recommendations have been properly interpreted and implemented during design. In the event GFAC Engineering Inc. is not retained to perform this recommended review, we will assume no responsibility for misinterpretation of our recommendations. 5.2
CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION AND TESTING
We recommend that all earthwork during construction be monitored by a representative of GFAC Engineering Inc. These observations should include site preparation, placement of all engineered fill and trench backfill, construction of slab and pavement subgrades, and all foundation excavations. The purpose of these services would be to provide GFAC Engineering Inc. the opportunity to observe the soil conditions encountered during construction, evaluate the applicability of the recommendations presented in this report to the soil conditions encountered, and recommend appropriate changes in design or construction procedures if conditions differ from those described herein. The following section outlines geotechnical engineering and construction testing services necessary to implement the recommendations presented in this report. The following services should be provided by a qualified testing firm: 1. An experienced engineering technician should observe the subgrade throughout the proposed construction areas immediately following stripping and undercutting to identify areas requiring additional undercutting and to evaluate the suitability of the exposed surface for fill placement. 2. An experienced engineering technician should monitor and test all fill placed within the building and pavement areas to determine
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 22 of 24
March 21, 2014
whether the type of material, moisture content and degree of compaction are within recommended limits. 3. An experienced engineering technician should observe the moisture conditioning and proofrolling of the subgrade prior to placement of structural fill to evaluate the suitability of the exposed surface for fill placement. 4. An experienced technician or engineer should observe and test all foundation excavations. Where unsuitable bearing conditions are observed, remedial procedures can be established in the field to avoid construction delays. 5. The condition of the subgrade should be evaluated immediately prior to construction of the building floor slab to determine whether the moisture content of subgrade soils and condition of soils are as recommended.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 23 of 24
March 21, 2014
6. LIMITATIONS
Recommendations contained in this report are based on our field observations and subsurface explorations, limited laboratory tests, and our present knowledge of the proposed construction. It is possible that subsurface conditions could vary between or beyond the points explored.
If subsurface conditions are encountered during
construction that differ from those described herein, we should be notified immediately in order that a review may be made and any supplemental recommendations provided. If the scope of the proposed construction, including the proposed loads or structural locations, changes from that described in this report, our recommendations should also be reviewed. We have prepared this report in substantial accordance with the generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice as it exists in the site area at the time of our study. No warranty is expressed or implied. The recommendations provided in this report are based on the assumption that an adequate program of tests and observations will be conducted by GFAC Engineering Inc. during the construction phase in order to evaluate compliance with our recommendations. The scope of our services did not include any environmental assessment or exploration for the presence of hazardous or toxic materials in the soil, surface water, groundwater or air, on, below or around this site. This report may be used only by owner and only for the purposes stated, within a reasonable time from its issuance, but in no event later than three years from the date of report. Land use, site conditions (both on-site and off-site), regulations, or other factors may change over time, and additional work may be required with the passage of time. Any party other than the client who wishes to use this report shall notify GFAC Engineering Inc. of such intended use. Based on the intended use of the report, GFAC Engineering Inc. may require that additional work be performed and that an updated report be issued.
Non-compliance with any of these requirements by the client or
anyone else will release GFAC Engineering Inc. from any liability resulting from the use of this report by any unauthorized party and client agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless GFAC Engineering Inc. from any claim or liability associated with such unauthorized or non-compliance. Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
Page 24 of 24
March 21, 2014
APPENDIX A PLATE 1 – SITE VICINITY MAP PLATE 2 – BORING LOCATION PLAN SUBSURFACE DIAGRAM BORING LOGS
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
March 21, 2014
FIELD EXPLORATION PROGRAM
The fieldwork for this study was performed on March 12, 2014.
The exploration
consisted of a total of two (2) borings. Borings B-01 and B-02 were performed within the proposed building footprint and were extended to approximate depths of 15 feet below the existing ground surface levels. Representatives of GFAC Engineering Inc. established the boring locations in the field. These locations were identified in the field by measuring distances from existing site features to the respective boring locations. Right angles were estimated.
Elevations at the boring locations were determined
through use of an engineer’s level and were referenced to the concrete slab located at the southeast corner of the existing building. (see Plate 2, labeled BM). This elevation is anticipated to be relatively close to the finish floor level of the existing building. The elevation of the temporary benchmark was taken to be 100.0 feet.
Locations and
elevations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the methods used to obtain them. The drilling operations were supervised by a representative of GFAC Engineering Inc. The borings were drilled using a track-mounted (CME 45), rotary drill using hollow stem augers to advance the borings.
Representative samples were obtained split-barrel
sampling procedures in general accordance with ASTM D 1586.
The split-barrel
sampling procedure utilizes a standard 2-inch O.D. split-barrel sampler that is driven into the bottom of the boring with a 140-pound auto-hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the sampler the last 12 inches of a normal 18 inch penetration is recorded as the Standard Penetration Resistance Value (N). These "N" values are indicated on the boring logs at their depth of occurrence and provide an indication of the consistency and hardness of the material. Boring logs included in this appendix, present such data as soil and bedrock descriptions, depths, sampling intervals and observed groundwater conditions. Conditions encountered in each of the borings were monitored and recorded by the field engineer. Field logs included visual classification of the materials encountered during Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
March 21, 2014
drilling, as well as drilling characteristics. Our final boring logs represent the engineer’s interpretation of the field logs combined with laboratory observation and testing of the samples.
Stratification boundaries indicated on the boring logs were based on
observations during our fieldwork, an extrapolation of information obtained by examining samples from the borings and comparisons of soils with similar engineering characteristics. Locations of these boundaries are approximate, and the transitions between soil and bedrock types may be gradual rather than clearly defined.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
March 21, 2014
Not to Scale
Project Location
Source : ESRI
SITE VICINITY MAP Central Server/School Safe Room 1700 Beacon Street Muskogee, Oklahoma Project G2014008 March 13, 2014 Plate 1
Not to Scale
B-01 BM
B-02
Boring locations indicated are approximate.
BORING LOCATION PLAN Central Server/School Safe Room 1700 Beacon Street Muskogee, Oklahoma Project G2014008 March 13, 2014 Plate 2
STRATIGRAPHY & GW - A SIZE - GINT STD US LAB.GDT - 3/19/14 17:17 - C:\USERS\PUBLIC\DOCUMENTS\BENTLEY\GINT\PROJECTS\G2014008_MUSKOGEE SECURE SERVER-SAFE ROOM.GPJ
1.0
1.5
2.0
.
2.5
0.5
1.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
100
102
94
92
90
88
86
84
94
92
90
88
86
84
1.5
4.5
96
0
4.0
96
B-02
3.5
98
B-01
3.0
98
100
102
0.5
PROJECT LOCATION 1700 Beacon Street, Muskogee, OK
PROJECT NUMBER G2014008
0
PROJECT NAME Central Server/School Safe Room
SUBSURFACE DIAGRAM
CLIENT Muskogee Public Schools
GFAC Engineering Inc. 4150 South 100th E. Ave Ste. 200-K Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 Telephone: 9186227021
Elevation (ft)
BORING NUMBER B-01
GFAC Engineering Inc. 4150 South 100th E. Ave Ste. 200-K Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 Telephone: 9186227021
PAGE 1 OF 1
CLIENT Muskogee Public Schools
PROJECT NAME Central Server/School Safe Room
PROJECT NUMBER G2014008
PROJECT LOCATION 1700 Beacon Street, Muskogee, OK
DATE STARTED 3/12/14
COMPLETED 3/12/14
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Mohawk Drilling
HOLE SIZE 6 inches
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING METHOD Hollow Stem Auger 6"
AT TIME OF DRILLING --- DRY
LOGGED BY PV
AT END OF DRILLING --- DRY
CHECKED BY DLK
PLASTICITY INDEX
40
17
23
TOPSOIL SANDY SILT, moist, very soft, dark brown and red SS 1
78
1-1-1 (2)
24
SS 2
89
4-7-8 (15)
24
SS 3
83
3-4-4 (8)
23
SS 4
83
5-7-8 (15)
19
SS 5
83
17-23-38 (61)
13
LEAN TO FAT CLAY with sand, moist, stiff, brown, gray, and amber
5 LEAN CLAY with sand, moist, stiff, brown, gray, and amber
10
HIGHLY WEATHERED SHALE, moist, soft, brown, gray, and amber
WEATHERED SHALE, moist, soft, brown and gray
15 Bottom of borehole at 15.0 feet.
FINES CONTENT (%)
PLASTIC LIMIT
ATTERBERG LIMITS LIQUID LIMIT
MOISTURE CONTENT (%)
DRY UNIT WT. (pcf)
BLOW COUNTS (N VALUE)
Uncon. Strength (psf)
0
Texas Cone Penetrometer
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
RECOVERY % (RQD)
AFTER DRILLING --SAMPLE TYPE NUMBER
GRAPHIC LOG
DEPTH (ft)
NOTES
GEO BASE - GINT STD US LAB.GDT - 3/20/14 18:04 - C:\USERS\PUBLIC\DOCUMENTS\BENTLEY\GINT\PROJECTS\G2014008_MUSKOGEE SECURE SERVER-SAFE ROOM.GPJ
GROUND ELEVATION 100 ft
BORING NUMBER B-02
GFAC Engineering Inc. 4150 South 100th E. Ave Ste. 200-K Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 Telephone: 9186227021
PAGE 1 OF 1
CLIENT Muskogee Public Schools
PROJECT NAME Central Server/School Safe Room
PROJECT NUMBER G2014008
PROJECT LOCATION 1700 Beacon Street, Muskogee, OK
DATE STARTED 3/12/14
COMPLETED 3/12/14
DRILLING CONTRACTOR Mohawk Drilling
HOLE SIZE 6 inches
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
DRILLING METHOD Hollow Stem Auger 6"
AT TIME OF DRILLING --- DRY
LOGGED BY PV
AT END OF DRILLING --- DRY
CHECKED BY DLK
PLASTICITY INDEX
49
19
30
TOPSOIL FILL - Sandy Silt with gravel, moist, dark brown SANDY SILT, moist, loose, dark brown
SS 1
78
4-4-4 (8)
22
SS 2
78
4-6-7 (13)
23
SS 3
72
4-6-9 (15)
23
SS 4
83
4-6-6 (12)
18
SS 5
94
19-3850/4"
13
- brown with orange and wet below 1.8 feet LEAN TO FAT CLAY with sand, moist, stiff, brown, gray, and amber
5 LEAN CLAY with sand, moist, stiff, brown, gray, and amber
10 HIGHLY WEATHERED SHALE with siltstone gravel, moist, soft, brown
WEATHERED SHALE, moist, soft, brown
SHALE, soft, gray and brown Bottom of borehole at 14.8 feet.
FINES CONTENT (%)
PLASTIC LIMIT
ATTERBERG LIMITS LIQUID LIMIT
MOISTURE CONTENT (%)
DRY UNIT WT. (pcf)
BLOW COUNTS (N VALUE)
Uncon. Strength (psf)
0
Texas Cone Penetrometer
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
RECOVERY % (RQD)
AFTER DRILLING --SAMPLE TYPE NUMBER
GRAPHIC LOG
DEPTH (ft)
NOTES
GEO BASE - GINT STD US LAB.GDT - 3/20/14 18:04 - C:\USERS\PUBLIC\DOCUMENTS\BENTLEY\GINT\PROJECTS\G2014008_MUSKOGEE SECURE SERVER-SAFE ROOM.GPJ
GROUND ELEVATION 100 ft
APPENDIX B LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
March 21, 2014
LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM
GENERAL Laboratory tests were performed on select, representative samples to evaluate pertinent engineering properties of these materials. We directed our laboratory testing program primarily toward classifying the subsurface materials, and measuring index values of the on-site materials.
Laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with
applicable standards, and the results are presented on the respective boring logs. The laboratory testing program consisted of the following: •
Moisture content tests ASTM D 2216, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass
•
Atterberg limits tests ASTM D 4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
•
Visual classification ASTM D 2488, Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)
CLASSIFICATION All samples were examined in field by a geotechnical engineer using visual and manual procedures. The samples were classified in general accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System, and are shown on the boring logs. Bedrock units encountered in the borings were described based on visual classification of disturbed auger cuttings and recovered samples, as well as drilling characteristics. Core samples may reveal other rock types.
Copyright 2014 GFAC ENGINEERING INC.
March 21, 2014
SECTION 02225 TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Excavate trenches for utilities from outside building to municipal utilities.
B.
Compacted bedding under fill over utilities to Subgrade elevations.
C.
Backfilling and compaction.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing fill compaction.
B.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Water control in excavations.
C.
Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Topsoil and subsoil removal from site surface.
D.
Section 02222 - Excavation: General building excavation.
E.
Section 02223 - Backfilling: General backfilling.
F.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete material.
l.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM 136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
B.
ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture - Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop.
C.
ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Samples: Submit 10 lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory in air-tight containers.
1.05 A.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
FILL MATERIALS Materials as specified in Section 02223.
SECTION 02225 PAGE 1
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02
EXAMINATION Verify fill materials to be reused, is acceptable. PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
B.
Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work areas.
C.
Protect plant life, lawns and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
D.
Protect bench marks, designated existing structures, from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.
E.
Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
F.
Cut out soft areas of Subgrade not capable of on-site compaction. Back fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent back fill material.
3.03
EXCAVATION
A.
Excavate subsoil required for sanitary sewer, water and gas piping to municipal utilities.
B.
Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection.
C.
Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45-degree bearing splay of foundations.
D.
Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.
E.
Remove lumped subsoil, boulders and rock up to l/3 cu yd, measured by volume.
F.
Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.
G.
Correct areas over-excavated by error.
H.
Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site.
3.04 A. 3.05
BEDDING Support pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill. BACKFILLING
A.
Back fill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.
B.
Systematically back fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not back fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy Subgrade surface.
C.
Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth.
SECTION 02225 PAGE 2
D.
Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage conduit or duct in trench.
E.
Maintain optimum moisture content of back fill materials to attain required compaction density.
F.
Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.
3.06 A. 3.07 A. 3.08
TOLERANCES Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provision of Section 01500.
B.
Protect fills subjected to vehicular traffic. END OF SECTION
SECTION 02225 PAGE 3
SECTION 02281 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03
SECTION INCLUDES Soil treatment for termite control below grade at interior and exterior foundation perimeter. RELATED SECTIONS Section 02223 - Back fill materials. REFERENCES
A.
EPA - Environmental Protection Agency - Federal insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act.
B.
Product Data: indicate each toxicant to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate caution requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Maintenance Date: Indicate re-treatment schedule.
1.07
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for requirements for application and authority to use toxicant chemicals in accordance with EPA.
B.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants.
1.08
SEQUENCING
A.
Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01010.
B.
Apply toxicant hours prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs-on-grade or finish grading work outside foundations
1.09
WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for damage and repairs to building and building contents caused by termites. Repair damage. Re-treat where required.
SECTION 02281 PAGE 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.
B.
Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
2.02 A.
MIX Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant and ready to receive treatment.
B.
Verify final grading is complete.
3.02
APPLICATION
A.
Apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
B.
Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts.
C.
Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment.
D.
If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.
3.03
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Do not permit soil grading over treated work.
3.04 A.
SCHEDULES Foundation Walls (inside and outside) 1.
2.
Four gallons per ten lineal feet. Apply to critical area to a depth of one foot, along both sides of all foundation walls and around plumbing. Mix chemical with soil as it is being replaced in trench. Option: Probing or rodding at from 8" to 12" on center, along sides of foundations and injecting chemicals at a minimum pressure of 300 psi at a rate equal to that prescribed above.
SECTION 02281 PAGE 2
B.
Slabs-on-grade (Interior and Exterior within 5 feet of building footpring): 1. 2.
1 2 gallons per 10 square feet. Apply an overall treatment under entire surface of floor slab including porch floors and entrance platforms.
C.
Porous Fill: 1 gallon per 7 square feet.
D.
Expansion Joints, Conduits and Pipe Penetrations: 2 gallons per 7 square feet, to 3 feet from subject.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02281 PAGE 3
SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete sidewalks and stair steps, integral curbs, gutters, and median barriers.
B.
Aggregate base course.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base.
B.
Section 02223 - Backfilling: Compacted sub-base for paving.
C.
Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Asphalt parking lots and drives.
D.
Section 07900 - Sealants: Sealant for joints.
1.03 A. B.
REFERENCES ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. ANSI/ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
C.
ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
D.
ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete.
E.
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
F.
ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
G.
ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
H.
ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
I.
FS TT-C-800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Existing Surfaces.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, curing compounds.
1.05 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301
SECTION 02520 PAGE 1
1.06 A. 1.07 A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable standards for paving work on public property. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B.
2.02
FORM MATERIALS Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301, wood or steel form material, profiled to suit conditions. Joint Filler: ANSI/ASTM D1751 bituminous type; 2 inch thick, manufactured by Celotex Corporation. REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars.
B.
Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSI/ASTM A185; in coiled rolls, unfinished.
C.
Dowels: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade, plain steel, galvanized finish.
2.03
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150 Normal - Type I, Portland type, grey color.
B.
Fine and course mix aggregates: ASTM C33.
C.
Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 A.
B.
2.05
ACCESSORIES Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, 30 percent solids; manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals. Liquid Surface Sealer: Pentane Alki Polymer Silicone as manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., shall resist 98% of chloride ion penetration for 1" depth per AASHOTO - T259, and scaling resistance ASTM C 672 100 cycles, none. CONCRETE MIX - BY PRESCRIPTIVE CRITERIA
A.
Mix concrete in accordance with Section 03001.
B.
Provide concrete as follows: 1. 2.
Typical: Compressive Strength at 28 days: 3500 psi. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260.
SECTION 02520 PAGE 2
C.
Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixture will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
D.
Use calcium chloride only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
E.
Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
2.06
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide mix design under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Test samples in accordance with ACI 301.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify compacted subgrade, granular base, and stabilized soil is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B.
Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.02 A. 3.03
SUBBASE Prepare subbase in accordance with Municipality Public Work's standards. PREPARATION
A.
Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B.
Notify Archived/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
3.04
FORMING
A.
Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile.
B.
Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
C.
Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.
3.05
REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement to provide minimum 2" clearance to formed surfaces and 3" clearance where earth serves as form. B.
Interrupt reinforcement at contraction, control, and expansion joints.
C.
Provide doweled joints at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement.
3.06 A.
PLACING CONCRETE Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. SECTION 02520 PAGE 3
B.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints and are not disturbed during concrete placement.
C.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
D.
Place concrete to approved pattern. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at optimum time after finishing, but not more than 24 hours. Cut joints 1/3 into depth of slab. Seal joints with sealant per Section 7920. Provide contraction joints at tangents of curves meet straight runs. Space joints 20 feet on center spaced to coordinate with tooled joints in sidewalks. Space joints in curves at 20 o.c. and tangents.
3.07
FINISHING
A.
Area Paving: Light broom.
B.
Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radius and trowel joint edges.
C.
Median Barrier: Light broom, radius and trowel joint edges.
D.
Curbs and Gutters: Light broom.
E.
Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broom perpendicular to slope.
F.
Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI 301.
C.
Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.
3.09 A.
PROTECTION Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying excessive hot or cold Temperatures, and mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02520 PAGE 4
SECTION 02830 CHAIN LINK FENCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A.
SECTION INCLUDES Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.
B.
Preparation for post bases, concrete for posts.
C.
Manual Gates & Related Hardware.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM F567 - Installation of Chain-link Fence.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Fence Height: As shown on drawings.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings, and hardware.
C.
Manufacturer=s installation: indicate installation requirements.
1.05
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Materials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual.
B.
Fabric Size: CLFMI Standard Industrial
C.
Intermediate Posts: Schedule 40, Type 1, round.
D.
Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, And Gate Posts: Schedule 40, Type 1 Round.
2.02
COMPONENTS (PROVIDE MINIMUM SIZES & WEIGHTS SHOWN)
A.
End, Corner, Slope, and Pull Posts:6’-0”: 3" OD, 5.79 #/Lin. Ft.
B.
Line Posts:6’-0”: 2-1/2" OD, 3.65 #/Lin. Ft.
SECTION 02830 PAGE 1
C.
Gate Posts: Provide gate posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double gate installation, for nominal gate widths as follows: 1.
^'-0": 4" OD
D.
Top, Bottom, and Brace Rail: 1.66 inch diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled.
E.
Gate Frame: 1.66 inch diameter for fittings and truss rod fabrication.
F.
Fabric: 2 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, 10 gauge thick, top salvage twisted tight, bottom salvage knuckle end closed.
G.
Tension Wire: 7 gauge thick steel, single strand.
H.
Post Tops: Steel weather tight closure cap, one per post.
I.
Stretcher Bars and Stretcher Bar Bands: Provide according to the industry standards.
2.03
GATES
A.
Spacing: Space frame members maximum 8'-0" apart. (as shown on drawings0
B.
Gate Frames: 6' to 10' H x 8' W or less: 2" OD.
2.04
FOOTINGS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150 Normal - Type 1, Portland type, grey color.
B.
Fine and course mix aggregates: ASTM C33.
C.
Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.05
ACCESSORIES
A.
Caps: Cast steel galvanized, sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.
B.
Fittings: all fittings to be steel.
C.
Gate Hardware: Fork latch with gravity drop, two 180 degree gate hinges per leaf and hardware for padlock.
2.06
FINISHES
A.
Components, Accessories & Fabric: Galvanized to ANSI/ASTM A123, 1.8 oz/sq.ft. coating.
B.
Hardware: Galvanized to ASTM A153, 1.8 oz/sq.ft. coating.
SECTION 02830 PAGE 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
FOOTINGS:
A.
Drill holes for post footings in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil, strictly adhered to the dimensions and spacings shown.
B.
Footings: 1.
Provide 36" deep x 8" dia. footings for line posts for fabric heights of 6'-0" (Continuous)
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install system in accordance with ANSI/ASTM F567 and manufacturer=s instructions.
B.
Set intermediate gate and posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 1 inch above finish grade. Slope top of concrete block for water run-off.
C.
Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6" long rail sleeves
D.
Install center and bottom brace rail on corner gate leaves. END OF SECTION
SECTION 02830 PAGE 3
SECTION 02930 LAWN SOD PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Bermuda Grass Turf
1.02
DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE
A.
Sod shall be loaded into the transportation vehicle immediately upon harvesting. Sod shall be wet thoroughly with water and covered with heavy canvas or other approved cover to minimize moisture loss. Sod shall not be transported in a vehicle with open sides.
B.
Sod shall be dept moist and covered from the time it is harvested until planted. Sod shall be planted within forty eight (48) hours of harvesting. 1. 2.
Fertilizer and peat shall be kept in a dry storage area away from contaminants. Storage of materials shall be in areas designated or approved by the Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Sod: Bermuda Grass Turf
B.
Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer appropriate to site conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
SOD BED PREPARATION
A.
Finish grade shall be such that all mature grass installed as a part of this work shall be level with all adjoining sidewalks and ground level planting areas. The addition or removal of topsoil shall be accomplished, if necessary, to achieve finish grade.
B.
Prior to planting, test topsoil in areas to be planted in accordance with Article 1.05 Testing.
C.
The necessary soil amendments shall be applied within seven days before planting, and worked into the upper six inches (6") of topsoil. If fertilizer is applied dry, it shall be immediately incorporated into the soil with water.
D.
All areas to be sodded shall be treated with a pre-emergent designated or approved by the Architect and applied at the manufacturer’s recommended rate. Such application shall not be made in areas to be seeded.
E.
Prepared surface shall be floated smooth and free of bumps and depressions. Remove stones and foreign matter over two inches (2"0 in diameter from top two inches (2") of seedbed. Planting shall be done immediately thereafter, provided the bed had remained in a friable condition and has not become muddy or hard. If it has become hard, it shall be cultivated to a friable condition again. SECTION 02930 PAGE 1
3.02
SODDING OPERATIONS
A.
Sodding shall be done in areas as shown on planting plan and after preparation of soil as outlined in Article 3.01 Sod bed Preparation. Sod shall fill entire areas where shown, or 4’ wide if around edges of paving and building (refer to Sheet C100).
B.
The sod shall be moist when excavated; and kept moist until planted. Sod shall be planted within forty eight (48) hours of harvesting.
C.
Sod shall be laid perpendicular to the direction of the slope with alternate joints.
D.
Sod pieces shall be fitted together tightly. No joints shall be visible, and sod shall be rolled firmly and evenly by hand.
E.
All finished sodding shall be smooth and free of lumps and depressions.
F.
All sodded areas shall be watered immediately after final rolling.
3.03
COMPLETION OF WORK: Work shall be considered complete and eligible for final acceptance only after fulfillment of the following requirements and any applicable requirements as stated elsewhere in the specifications.
A.
All lawn areas shall have no bare areas or unacceptable cover larger than one (1) square foot.
B.
All grass must be vigorous, thick, and deep-rooted. Weeds shall not exist in sufficient number to damage appearance.
C.
The Owner will be responsible for all maintenance from the time the installation is complete and approved.
D.
After one (1) mowing by Owner, and when all above conditions are met, the Contractor and Architect, and Owner will inspect the lawn areas for final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02930 PAGE 2
SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORM WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Form work for cast-in-place concrete with bracing and anchorage.
B.
Openings for other work.
C.
Form accessories.
D.
Form stripping.
1.02 A.
1.03
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for placement by this Section. RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
ACI-347 - Recommended Practices for Concrete Form work.
B.
PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.05 A.
1.06
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Design, engineer and construct form work, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. SUBMITTALS
A. B.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing and arrangement of joints and ties.
C.
Product Date: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, 301 and 318.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
SECTION 03100 PAGE 1
1.08 A. 1.09
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of form work. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate this Section with other Sections of Work which require attachment of components to form work.
B.
If form work is placed after reinforcement resulting insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
FORM MATERIALS Form Materials: Design of form work is the contractor's responsibility. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Conform to ACI 301. Construct forms, unless otherwise specified, of wood or steel conforming at ACI 347. Design forms to resist subjected pressure. Provide ties with 1" breakback and attached water seal. Obtain approval of any manufacturer's standard type forming system contemplated for use. Approval of standard or fiberglass forms required.
B.
Wood: New and free of imperfections, S.P. species: #2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. Construct forms for flat slabs of 3/4 inch thick water-resistant plywood. Plywood may be reused for unexposed work, providing holes are filled flush and damaged portions satisfactorily repaired.
C.
Carton Forms: Biodegradable structurally sufficient to support concrete until set.
D.
Form Release Agent: Submit to Architect for Approval.
E.
If oil is used, remove excess oil with raps leaving surface oily to touch. Take care to keep reinforcing free of oil.
2.02 A.
2.03
PREFABRICATED FORMS Preformed Steel Forms; Minimum 16 gauge matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. FORM WORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Form Ties: Snap-Off type, galvanized metal.
B.
Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
C.
Corners: Chamfered type.
SECTION 03100 PAGE 2
D.
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required of sufficient strength and character to maintain form work in place while placing concrete.
E.
Waterstops: Waterstop-Rx as manufactured by American Collola Company or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A.
EXAMINATION Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with form work. Insure that dimensions agree with Drawings.
3.02
EARTH FORMS
A.
Obtain Architect's review for the use of earth forms.
B.
Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.03
ERECTION - FORM WORK
A.
Erect form work, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements in accordance with requirements of ACI 301.
B.
Provide bracing to ensure stability of form work. Shore or strengthen form work subject to overstressing by construction loads.
C.
Arrange and assemble form work to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
D.
Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
3.04
APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A.
Apply form release agent on form work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices and embedded items.
3.05
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS AND OPENINGS
A.
Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.
B.
Locate and set in place which will be cast directly into concrete.
C.
Coordinate work on other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts.
D.
Position recessed reglets for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in Section 04200.
E.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
F.
Install Waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Seal joins watertight.
SECTION 03100 PAGE 3
G.
Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottoms of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
H.
Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.06
FORM CLEANING
A
Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.
B. C.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
D.
During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms unless form work and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.07
FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A.
Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
B.
Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.1.
3.08 A.
3.09
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect erected formwork, shoring and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties and items are secure. FORM REMOVAL
A.
Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.
B.
Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C.
Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03100 PAGE 4
SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
SECTION INCLUDES Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-in-place concrete. RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
B.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Building.
B.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
C.
ACI SP - 66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual
D.
ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel; Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
E.
ATM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
F.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice.
G.
CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice Placing Reinforcing Bars.
H.
CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric and bending and cutting schedules.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Maintain one copy of document on site.
C.
Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
SECTION 03200 PAGE 1
1.06 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, yield grade as noted on drawings; deformed billet steel bars.
B.
Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185 Plain Type: coiled rolls
C.
Stirrup Steel: ANSI/ASTM A82, plain finish.
2.02
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Tie Wire: 16 ga annealed type.
B.
Chairs, Boisters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions. Conform to CRSI Manual.
C.
Special Chairs, Boisters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces; size and shape as required.
2.03
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice.
B.
Galvanized Reinforcement: Clean surfaces, weld and protect welded joint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
PLACEMENT
A.
Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.
B.
Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C.
Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D.
Conform to ACI 318 code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
3.02 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03200 PAGE 2
SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cast-in-place concrete foundation walls, footings and slabs.
B.
Floors and slab on grade.
C.
Control, expansion and contraction joint devices.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02520 - Portland Cement Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and drives.
B.
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories.
C.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
B.
ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 - Normal Portland Type.
B.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33 and ASTM C330
C.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.02
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air Entrainment: Conforming to ASTM C260.
B.
Chemical: Conforming to STM C494.
C.
Fly Ash Calcinated Pozzolan: ASTM C618.
SECTION 03300 PAGE 1
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A.
Bonding Agent: Latex emulsion.
B.
Vapor Barrier: Minimum 10 mil thick polyethylene film, type recommended for below grade application.
C.
Non-shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement water, reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi in 28 days.
2.04
JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A.
Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D1751 and ASTM D994; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick.
B.
Joint Filler Type B: ASTM D1752; Closed Cell polyvinyl chloride, resiliency recovery of 95 percent if not compressed more than 50 percent of original thickness.
C.
Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900.
2.05
CONCRETE MIX
A.
Mix in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B.
Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
C.
Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. 2.
Compressive Strength (28 days): As shown on drawings. Slump: As shown on drawings.
D.
Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
E.
Use calcium chloride only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
F.
Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
G.
Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
B.
Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
SECTION 03300 PAGE 2
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare previously placed concrete by clearing with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
3.03
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
NOTIFY ARCHITECT MINIMUM 24 HOURS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF OPERATIONS.
C.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joint fillers are not disturbed during concrete placement.
D.
Install Vapor Barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends.
E.
Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F.
Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G.
Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 3/8 inch thick joint filler.
H.
Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within ½ inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements.
I.
Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J.
Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken.
K.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control and construction joints.
L.
Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Using 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/3 depth of slab thickness.
M.
Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
3.02
CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Finish floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Steel trowel surfaces to receive carpeting and resilient flooring.
C.
Provide formed concrete walls.
D.
Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.
SECTION 03300 PAGE 3
E.
3.03
In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot, nominal. CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical injury. Refer notes on structural drawings for further information on curing.
B.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for each 50 or less cu yds of each class of concrete placed or one set for each days pour.
C.
One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.
D.
One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
3.07
PATCHING
A.
Allow Architect to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
B.
Excessive honeycomb or imbedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect upon discovery.
C.
Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301.
3.08
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.
B.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect.
C.
Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03300 PAGE 4
SECTION 03346 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Standard Floors PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Finishing slabs-on-grade, and supported slabs.
B.
Curing and sealing compounds for concrete walks, slabs and curbs outside the building or under the elevated portion of the ramp.
C.
Apply cure and seal compound to areas not scheduled to receive water-repellent listed in Section 07175.
1.02 A. 1.03
RELATED SECTIONS Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B.
ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
C.
ASTM E 1155 - Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness using the F - Number System ( Inch Pound units).
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Date: Provide date on sealer.
1.05
MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Maintain Data: provide data on maintenance renewal of applied sealer coatings.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.
B.
Maintenance one copy of document on site.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging including application instruction.
SECTION 03346 PAGE 1
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Temporary Heat: Ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum.
B.
Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sources affecting concrete.
1.09
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Coordinate the work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 A.
CURING BLANKETS Provide curing blankets and moisture cure for concrete. COMPOUNDS AND SEALERS Cure and Seal Sealer: ASTM C309 type 1, class A; acrylic clear sealer for paving. 1. 2. 3.
CS 309 by W.R. Meadows. DAG Chem Cure and Seal by Dayton Superior. Kure-N-Seal 0800 by Sonneborne.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this Section.
3.02
FINISHING
A.
Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.
B.
Do not add water to surface during finishing.
3.03
SURFACE TREATMENT
A.
Apply slip resistant finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction on floor surfaces.
B.
Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction on floor surfaces.
3.04 A.
TOLERANCES Measure for F (F) tolerance for floors in accordance with ASTM E1155, within 48 hours after slab
SECTION 03346 PAGE 2
installation. B.
Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances: (1) F(F) 25.
C.
Correct the slab surface if the actual F (F) number for the floor installation measurer less than required.
D.
Correct defects in the floor by grinding or removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03346 PAGE 3
SECTION 04200B UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM CONCRETE BLOCK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete masonry units
B.
Reinforcement, anchorage and accessories.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Placement of steel anchors.
B.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI\ASTM A82 - Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
B.
ANSI/ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick.
C.
IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
D.
UL - Underwriters= Laboratories.
E. F.
ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Submit two samples of block to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range.
1.05 A.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with a minimum 5 years documented experience. MOCK-UP (If Requested)
A.
Provide mock-up of composite brick and clock masonry under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Erect face brick and block to 6 x 4 feet panel size, include specified mortar and accessories.
C.
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. When directed SECTION 04200B PAGE 1
demolish mock-up and remove from site.
1.07 A. 1.08
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B.
Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Chandler Materials, Tulsa
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 A. B. 2.03
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Hollow Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1, Light Weight 8" X 8" X 16" or as shown on drawings. Blocks to be split scored, one score per block (mid block) REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Dowels: 3/8 inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated, hot-dip galvanized steel.
B.
Wall Reinforcing: truss type, galvanized steel construction; No. 9 side rods and No. 9 crossties; Dur-O-Wall Trirod Manufactured by Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2.04 A.
FLASHING Plastic Flashing: Nervastral Seal-Pruf, H-D; 20 mil by Rubber & Plastics Compound Co. Inc.,or acceptable substitute.
2.05
MORTAR
A.
Mortar: Standard Masonry type aggregate ASTM C144. ASTM C150 Portland Cement, Type S Hydrated lime, Potable water. Color: To Be Selected by Architect via submittals.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work.
B.
Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. SECTION 04200B PAGE 2
C.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03
COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimensions. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.
C.
Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course three brick units and three mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints.
3.04
PLACING AND BONDING
A.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, will full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
B.
Lay hollow masonry units in face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
D.
Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.
E.
Interlock intersections and external corners.
F.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.
G.
Perform job site curing of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
H.
Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated.
I.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler.
J.
Install weep holes in veneer at 32 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles, and at bottom of walls.
K.
Wet cast stone just prior to setting in mortar.
L.
Set cast stone units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise noted, with vertical joints flushed full.
3.05
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES SECTION 04200B PAGE 3
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 each side of opening.
C.
Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings.
E.
Reinforce stack bonded until joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches o.c.
3.06
MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Extend Flashings under over through veneer, turn up minimum 8 inches and seal to sheathing over framed back-up.
B.
Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
C.
Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive and sealer.
3.07 A. 3.08
LINTELS Install loose steel lintels over window openings, and door openings. GROUTED COMPONENTS
A.
Reinforce bond beam with 2 No. 2 M bars.
B.
Reinforce pilaster with no. 2 M bars.
C.
Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
D.
Support and secure reinforcing from displacement. Maintain position within 2 inch of dimensioned position.
E.
Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
F.
At all bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening.
3.09
CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B.
Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
3.10 A.
BUILT-IN WORK As work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, anchor bolts, plates and other items furnished by other Sections. SECTION 04200B PAGE 4
B.
Build in items plumb and level.
C.
Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from frames openings.
D.
Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.11
TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch.
B.
Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 2 inch in 20 feet or more.
D.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 2 inch into stories or more.
E.
Maximum Variation From Level Cursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 2 inch in 30 feet.
F.
Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.
G.
Maximum Variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
3.12
CUTTING AND FITTING
A.
Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape and location.
B.
Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to cutting or filling masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.13
CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.
C.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution
E.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.14
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.
END OF SECTION SECTION 04200B PAGE 5
SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Structural steel framing members, support members, with required backing welds, and fasteners.
B.
Steel lintels.
C.
Base plates and connectors.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B.
ATM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
C.
ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
D.
ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
E.
ASTM A435 - Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examinations of Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels.
F.
ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes.
G.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
H.
AISC - Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
I.
FS-TT-P-31 - Paint, Oil: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, Red and Brown.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Indicate profiles, sizes, lengths, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, fasteners and cambers.
C.
Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
D.
Detail and mark each structural piece on the shop drawings.
1.04 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform field testing in accordance with Section 01400.
SECTION 05120 PAGE 1
B.
Field Testing of Welding and Materials: Provide inspection of welding by the Testing Agency to assure that the work conforms to specified requirements. Include ascertainment that: 1. 2.
3.
4.
C.
Electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to the requirements of this section. The approved welding procedure and the approved welding sequence are followed without deviation, unless specified approval for change is obtained from the Architect/Engineer. The welding is performed only by welding operators and welders who are properly certified. The Testing Agency shall witness such qualifications testing of welding operators and welders, as may be required. The fit-up, joint preparation, size, contour, extent of reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to specified requirements and the contract drawings, and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without approval of Architect/Engineer.
Testing Agency shall perform tests in the Fabricator’s shop as follows: 1. 2.
All welds: 100 percent visual. All full or partial penetration groove welded connections and splices: 100 percent ultrason ic.
3. 4.
5.
All other welds: 10 percent magnetic particle. Delamination and non-metallic inclusion tests of base metal: Plates are portions of rolled shapes three inches or greater in thickness shall be 1-0-0 percent ultrasonically tested in a zone extending six inches in all directions from any full penetration groove weld which, transmits stress through the thickness of the material, or any weld which, because of restraint and weld shrinkage will, in the opinion of the inspector, cause significant through-thickness (Z-direction) stress in the material. Make tests after completion of welding. Acceptance criteria for such tests shall be in accordance with ASTM A435. Embedded plates and assemblies shall have all welded reinforcing tested by magnetic particle and all stud connectors tested in the following quantities: a. b. c.
D.
Testing Agency shall test field welds as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Assemblies supporting structural elements: 100 percent. Assemblies supporting precast concrete or stone curtain wall elements: 60 percent. Assemblies supporting curtain wall elements: 20 percent.
All welds: 100 percent visual. All full or partial penetration groove welds in “H” piles and transfer elements: 100 percent ultrasonic. All full or partial penetration groove welded connections and splices in all levels of structural steel framing: 100 percent. All other full or partial penetration groove welded connections and splices: 10 percent ultrasonic. All other welds: 10 percent magnetic particles.
All cost of additional inspection required due to rejected welds shall be at not additional cost to Owner.
SECTION 05120 PAGE 2
F.
In addition, if defective welds are discovered, the remaining uninspected welds shall receive such ultrasonic or magnetic particles inspection as may be required by the Architect/Engineer.
G.
The welding inspector shall have the authority to reject weldments. Such rejection may be based on visual inspection where in his opinion the weldment would not pass a more detailed investigation.
H.
Reports by the Testing Agency shall contain, as a minimum, an adequate description of each weld tested, the identifying mark of the welder responsible for the weld, a critique of any defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and a statement regarding the acceptability of the weld tested, as judged by current A.W.S. standards. Reports shall be distributed as early as possible, but not later than one work week after the tests have been performed. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified by phone if, in the judgment of the inspector, test results require immediate comment.
I.
Radiographic testing may be substituted for ultrasonic, with Architect/Engineer’s approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992, Grade 50.
B.
Channels, Angles M, S-Shapes: ASTM A-36.
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A-36.
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A-500, Grade B, structural tubing.
E.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
F.
Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
G.
Structural Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.
H.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 1. 2. 3.
I.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1: type required for materials being welded. 1.
J.
ASTM A325, for bearing connections with calculated stresses. ASTM A307, for anchor bolts. Load Indicator Bolts: Le Jeune bolts as manufactured by Le Jeune Bolt Co. Or Bethlehem Steel Corp.
Welds shown have been designated for E70XX electrodes.
Primer: FS TT-P-31. 1.
For structural members exposed as finish, clean by commercial blast (SSPC-6 and prime with Tnemec Versare 4-55 (white) or Tnemec Chem-prime 37-77 (white), 2.0 mils dry film.
SECTION 05120 PAGE 3
K. 2.02
Stud Shear Connectors as noted on drawings. FABRICATION
A.
Fabrication structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specification.
B.
Columns to be fabricate with base plates attached.
2.03 A.
FINISH Clean, structural steel members, prepare, and shop prime. Do not prime surfaces to be filed welded.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
PREPARATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
C.
Stud shear connections shall be installed and tested in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.03 A.
ERECTION Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification. 1. 2.
B.
Welded connections unless otherwise indicated: standard AISC welded connections. Bolted connections unless otherwise indicated; standard AISC bolted connections.
Install direct tension indicator washers at all locations except not required at bearing connections. At the Contractor’s option use on of the following: 1. 2.
Load Indicators Washers Load Indicators Bolts
C.
Make provision for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structural safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
D.
Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer.
E.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized; Use a primer consistent with shop coat. Use primer recommended for galvanized surfaces.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions , and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized. Use zinc rich coating such as Z.R.C. cold galvanizing compound for galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION
SECTION 05120 PAGE 4
SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Steel floor, form, and roof deck and accessories.
B.
Framed openings up to 18 inches.
C.
Bearing plates and angles.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Concrete work: Anchorages for bearing plates and angles to be cast in concrete.
B.
Section 04200 - Masonry Work: Anchorages for bearing plates and angles embedded in masonry.
C.
Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
B.
ASTM A36- Structural Steel.
C.
ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality .
D.
ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, Galvanized by the Hot-Dip process.
E.
ASTM A611 - Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural
F.
AWS D1.1 -0 Structural Welding Code.
G.
SDI-Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan, deck profile dimensions, supports, projections, openings and reinforcement, finishes, pertinent details, and accessories.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store products at the site under provisions of section 01600.
B.
Store decking on wood sleepers with slope for positive drainage.
SECTION 05300 PAGE 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
Manufacturers:
A.
Vulcraft
B.
Robertson
C.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Steel, Composite Floor Deck: ASTM A446, Grade A structural quality; with ASTM A525, G60 coating: composite floor deck.
B.
Sheet Steel, Roof Deck: ASTM A611, Grade C, primed.
C.
Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36 steel.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1
E.
Cell Closures: Closed cell or foam rubber one inch thick, profiled to decking.
F.
Metal Closure Strips, Wet concrete Stops, Cover Plates, and Related Accessories; of required profiles, gage and size.
G.
Primer: Red oxide type.
2.03
FABRICATION
A.
Metal roof decking: Refer Pre-Engineered Building Specification Section 13121.
B.
Floor Deck: Minimum 20 gage, sheet steel, 1.3 inch high, with lapped joints.
C.
Fabricate metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks to accommodate maximum working stress of 33,000 psi, and maximum span deflection of 1/240.
D.
Fabricate roof sump pan of 14 gage, flat bottom sloped edges, recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, watertight.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
ERECTION
A.
Erect metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks. Provide welding in accordance with AWS 1.1.
B.
On steel support members provide 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level on supports.
C.
Mechanically fasten male/female side laps at 24 inches oc maximum.
D.
Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with 3/4 inch fusing SECTION 05300 PAGE 2
E.
welds at 12 inches oc maximum. Fasten AV@ rib forms to steel support members with plug welds through 3/4 inch diameter steel washers at 2 inches oc.
F.
Reinforce deck openings from 6 to 18 inches in size with 2 x 2 x 1/3 inch steel angles or as shown on structural drawings. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes each side of opening and weld to deck.
G.
Install 6 inch wide sheet steel cover plates where deck changes direction. Spot weld in place 12 inches oc maximum.
H.
Install sheet steel strip closures at floor edge upturned to thickness of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide closures of sufficient strength to remain in place without distortion.
I.
Install sheet steel closures and angle flashing to close openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings.
J.
Install foam cell closures in locations above walls and partitions.
K.
Position roof sump pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Weld at each deck flute.
L.
Immediately after welding deck in place, touch-up welds, burned areas, and surfaces coating damage with prime paint.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05300 PAGE 3
SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes all metal framing with anchorage and bracing such as lintels, metal connections, plates, joists, etc.
B.
Steel Handrails, Brackets and Fittings.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A36 - Structural Steel
B.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code
C.
ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality
D.
ASTM A90 - Weight for Coating on Galvanized Iron or Steel Articles
E.
FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type
F.
ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1.
2. 1.04 A.
Indicate component details, framed openings, bearings, anchorage, loading, welds, type and locations of fasteners and accessories or items required of related work for complete installation. Provide design calculations for loadings and stresses of designed loads.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
MATERIALS Bracing, Furring, Bridging, Plate, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered, manufacturer's standard shapes.
SECTION 05400 PAGE 1
B.
Steel Railing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.02
Handrails: 1-1/2"diameter steel pipe, welded joints as shown on drawings. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets, escutcheons - machined steel. Mounting: Adjustable brackets and flanges appropriate for location and use. Prepare backing plate for mounting in wall construction. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts, consistent with design of railing. Wire Mesh: 2” x 2” mesh infill at shown areas.
FASTENINGS
A.
Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A90.
B.
Anchorage Devices: Power driven or power actuated, drilled expansion bolts or screw with sleeves.
2.03 A. 2.04
FINISHES Galvanized with Primer FABRICATION
A.
Galvanize, touch-up and prime paint metal materials and fabricate assemblies of sizes and profiles required, joints fitted, secured reinforced and braced to suit design requirements.
B.
Railing Fabrication: 1. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of the component, except where noted otherwise. 4. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication. 5. Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. 6. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 7. Accurately form components to suit stairs and landings, to each other and to building structure.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A.
EXAMINATION Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. PREPARATION Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where welding is required.
SECTION 05400 PAGE 2
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items and prevent stud rotation.
B.
Set items with bearing, lateral bracing and bridging in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Make provision for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing.
D.
Install components level and plumb, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05400 PAGE 3
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Wood framing and sheathing.
B.
Preservative treatment.
C.
Wood fencing.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
FS TT-W550 - Wood Preservative, Chromated Copper Arsenate Mixture.
B.
FS TT-W568 - Wood Preservative, Creosote - Petroleum Solution
C.
FS TT-W570 - Wood Preservative, Pentachlorophenol.
D.
FS TT-W571 - Wood Preservation, Treating Practices.
E.
FS TT-W572 - Wood Preservative, Water Repellent.
F.
NFPA - National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastening.
G.
PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
H.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Lumber: Identify with grade stamp of an agency certified by NFPA.
B.
Fire retardant treatment to conform to requirements of Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).
1.04 A.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable code for fire retardant treatment of wood surfaces for flame/fuel/smoke ratings. PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Identify preservative properties, method of treatment, expected service life.
SECTION 06100 PAGE 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Lumber: PS 20, graded in accordance with NFPA Grading Rules; maximum moisture content of 19 percent; SYP or Douglas Fir species; construction grade for lengths of 8'-0" and over; standard grade for lengths less than 8'-0".
B.
Softwood Plywood: PS 1; CDX Sheathing Grade; exterior quality.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A.
Nails, Spikes, and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit application.
B.
Bolts, Nut, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size an type to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations.
C.
Fasteners: Expansion shield and lag bolt tye for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel.
D.
Hinges and Gate Latch Assembly: Galvanized steel, as required for installation.
2.03 A. 2.04 A.
WOOD TREATMENT MATERIALS Wood Preservative: FS TT - W550 or TT-W570 materials listed in TT-W571 and TT-W572. SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS Kiln dry wood after pressure treatments to maximum 15 percent moisture content.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Brush or spray apply two coats of preservative treatment for wood in contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related metal flashings.
B.
Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Redry to 19 percent moisture content.
C.
Treat site-sawn ends. Allow preservative to cure prior to placing members.
D.
Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
SECTION 06100 PAGE 2
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install miscellaneous blocking, furring, cants, nailing strips, and framing.
B.
Install members true, plumb, and level. Secure in place.
C.
Space miscellaneous framing and furring at 16 inches on center.
D.
Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
E.
Erect fence and gate according to drawings.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 06100 PAGE 3
SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wood furring and grounds.
B.
Concealed wood blocking.
C.
Telephone and electrical panel boards.
D.
Preservative treatment of wood.
E.
Blocking in wall and roof openings.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking.
B.
Check for blocking for wall mounted items.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ALSC: American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards.
B.
APA: American Plywood Association.
C.
AWPA: American Wood Preservers Association: C1 - All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process.
D.
NFPA: National Forest Products Association
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Section 01300 - Submit under provisions of this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. 2.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA.
B.
Miscellaneous Framing Stress Group D, 19 percent maximum moisture content.
SECTION 06114 PAGE 1
C. 2.02 A.
Plywood: APA, Grade C-D, sanded. ACCESSORIES Fasteners and Anchors: 1. 2.
2.03
Fasteners: Hot-Dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.
FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Fire Retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Interior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25/35. (Where called out on Drawings).
B.
Wood Preservative Surface Application: Clear, FS TT-W-550 or TT-W-570 Type. (Where called out on drawings.)
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
FRAMING
A.
Set members level and plumb in correct position.
B.
Place horizontal members flat, crown side up.
C.
Construct curb members of single pieces.
D.
Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c.
3.02
SHEATHING
A.
Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered.
B.
Install telephone and electrical panel boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Oversize the panel by 12 inches on all sides.
3.03
SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts.
C.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 06114 PAGE 2
SECTION 07181 WATER REPELLENT COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
SECTION INCLUDES Water repellent coating applied to exterior and interior masonry, and concrete surfaces. RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 04200 - Masonry: Masonry surfaces.
B.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 A. 1.04
REFERENCES FS SS-W-110C - Water Repellent, Colorless Silicone, Resin Base. SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provision of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating, cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical properties including percentage of solids.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.
1.05
MOCKUP
A.
Provide mockup of surface to be coated under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Prepare coated surface 36 x 36 inch in size.
C.
Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Protect coating liquid from freezing.
1.07 A.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Do not apply coating when surface temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F.
SECTION 07181 PAGE 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Thompson's Water Seal - Product #101.
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
B.
Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and free of efflorescence, oil or other matter detrimental to application of coating.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Delay work until masonry mortar substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days.
B.
Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
C.
Remove oil or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coating.
D.
Scrub and rinse surface with water and let dry.
3.03
APPLICATION
A.
Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply in two continuous uniform coats.
3.04
PROTECTION TO FINISHED AND ADJACENT WORK
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
B.
Protect landscaping, property and vehicles.
C.
If applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by a method instructed by coating manufacturer. END OF SECTION
SECTION 07181 PAGE 2
SECTION 07210 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
SECTION INCLUDES Batt and blanket insulation. RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Concrete.
B.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board
1.03 A.
1.04
REFERENCES Federal Specifications FS HH-1-521: Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures). DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver in original unopened packages with legible intact labels indicating brand name, type and thermal resistance ® value. Store materials out of weather in locations to preserve original condition.
B.
Protect plastic foam insulation from exposure to sunlight and fire.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
BATT OR BLANKET INSULATION AT WALLS
A.
Type FS HH-1-521 Type II with non-reflective vapor barrier.
B.
Thickness: 6" to attain thermal resistance ®) value of 19 (or as indicated on drawings) and 4" to attain thermal resistance of 13 (or as indicated on drawings).
C.
Width: Full width to fit snugly between studs or other framing members. Insulation shall have tabs and be mechanically fastened to studs or furring strips to hold in place.
2.02
BATT OR BLANKET INSULATION ABOVE CEILINGS
A.
Formaldehyde-free fiberglass insulation (unfazed batts with no vapor barrier).
B.
Thickness: 4” to attain a thermal value of 13.
2.03
BATT OR BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Formaldehyde-free fiberglass insulation (with non-reflective vapor barrier).
B.
Thickness: 6”
SECTION 07210 PAGE 1
2.04
RIGID INSULATION (PERIMETER FOUNDATION)
A.
Extruded polystyrene, Type IV, Styrofoam SM as manufactured by Dow Chemical U.S.A. or Foamular 250 as manufactured by UC industries.
B.
Thickness: one inch
C.
Width: 24" minimum to be placed vertically and horizontally continuous along slab edges and perimeter footings.
2.05 A. 2.06
LOOSE FILL INSULATION FOR CMU BLOCK WALLS Vermiculite loose fill masonry insulation, moisture resistant type. All cells must be filled. ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide type and adhesive recommended by insulation manufactured.
C.
Provide impaling pins, hangers, clips, staples, and other fasteners as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
GENERAL
A.
Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
B.
Install vapor barriers towards inside of building and provide continuous vapor seal.
C.
Install vapor barrier to provide continuous under floor slab seal.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Batt or Blanket With Vapor Barrier: 1. Install in widths to fit between studs and furring channels. Mastic apply tabs to studs with vapor barrier towards inside of building. 2. Where wrapped around beams or other construction, fasten insulation at ends and at sufficient intermediate points to securely attach to substrate.
B.
Vapor Retarder (where required): Install over prepared substrate. Install with long edges parallel to direction of concrete pour. Lap edges 6 inches and seal with adhesive or tape. Seal penetrations through membrane and punctures. 1. Install vapor retarder under concrete floor slabs. END OF SECTION
SECTION 07210 PAGE 2
SECTION 07511 MULTI-PLY COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Cold process built-up roof system. 2. Roofing insulation. 3. Flashing Assemblies. 4. Walkway Protection Landings.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking, curbs, cants, and nailers. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashing, flashing, and counterflashing. 3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 5. Division 15 Sections for roof drains.
1.02 A.
1.03
DEFINITIONS Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 for definitions of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Install a watertight, cold process built-up and base flashing roofing system with compatible components that will not permit the passage of liquid water and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
B.
UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing, base flashing, and component materials that comply with requirements of Underwriter’s Laboratory (U.L.) 790 Class A Fire Resistance and U.L. 1897 Class 90 Wind Resistance ratings. Roofing system shall be listed in the current U.L. "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with U.L. markings. 1. Roofing system shall comply with the following: a. U.L. 790 Fire Classification: Class A. b. U.L. 1897 Wind Classification: Class 1A-90
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, for the following: 1. Base flashing, cants, and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.
C.
Samples for Verification: Of the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch square of roofing insulation.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 1
2. 3. 4.
Roof membrane and base ply samples. 12-by-12-inch square of walkway pad. 6 insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
D.
Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system and is eligible to receive the roofing manufacturer's warranty. Roof contractor shall be experienced applying the specified roofing system and shall provide a list to the Project Architect seven (7) days prior to the bid date a list of five (5) projects where the specified roof system has been applied. Roof contractor shall provide a company name, phone number and contact person.
E.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that the roofing system complies with requirements specified in the "Performance Requirements" Article. On request, submit evidence of complying with requirements.
F.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of components of roofing system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product compositions. 1. Indicate compliance of bulk roofing asphalt materials delivered to Project with requirements. Include quantity and statistical and descriptive data for each product. Submit certificate with each load before it is used. 2. Written verification from roofing material manufacturer that the specified roofing system meets or exceeds ASTM 2523 for Testing Load Strain Properties of the Roofing Membrane. Minimum standards are listed in product section of these specifications.
H.
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
I.
Warranty: Sample copy of roofing manufacturer's proactive Ten (10) year roofing preventative maintenance service agreement stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of service agreement.
J.
Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation.
K.
Notarized documentation that roof system manufacturer has a history of producing/manufacturing this roofing system for at least as long as the manufacturer’s longest warranty, and not less than the specified warranty.
L.
The Muskogee Public Schools is desirous of working with a financially strong organization, which has the ability to protect and insulate the school from both product liability and warranty claims relating to roofing that could be brought before the building owner during the course of the roofing warranty period. As financial strength of suppliers are a requirement of the building owner proof of such must be shown. To this end, the following information is required by the building owner, to be submitted to the Project Architect: The manufacturer must present to the building owner a certificate of insurance for product liability with minimum limits of $ 25 million.
M.
To help ensure ethical conduct and reduce the potential for conflict of interest, and to provide full disclosure, the roof material manufacturer shall provide an affidavit from a company officer which shall include the confirmation that all field employees in their organization have signed an ethics policy agreeing they will conduct business in an ethical manner.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 2
N.
Roof system manufacturer shall provide the Project Architect names of at least three (3) qualified applicators to install the specified roofing system.
O.
Letter from roof system manufacturer that the technical service inspector overseeing the project for the specification compliance and installation quality is employed by the roof system manufacturer and have been an employee for a minimum of five (5) years. Technical service representative shall be prepared to respond to problems associated with roofing project within a two (2) hour period. In addition, field representative shall be available upon the Project Architects request during roofing activities and weekends.
P.
Letter from the roofing contractor shall agree to participate in allowances and adjustments for five (5) years of the warranty period when it is determined that defects area a result of application and workmanship errors. All defects noted during this time period will be corrected by the roof contractor at their own expense.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform Work of this Section who has specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project; who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product; and who is eligible to receive the standard roofing manufacturer's warranty.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; complying with Underwriters Laboratory (U.L.) Class 790.
C.
Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site. Meet with the same participants and review the same items listed for the preinstallation conference. In addition, review status of submittals and coordination of work related to roof construction. Notify participants at least 5 working days before conference.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store roofing materials in a dry, warm, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls. 1. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to deck or structural supporting members.
B.
Do not leave unused felts and other sheet materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and moisture and unless maintained at a temperature exceeding 40 deg F.
C.
Deliver and store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
D.
Protect roofing insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 3
1.07 A.
1.08 A.
1.09 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturer’s written instructions and warranty requirements. PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. WARRANTY/SERVICE AGREEMENT Upon project completion and the acceptance by the Project Architect and roof system manufacturer, the roofing manufacturer shall provide a Ten (10 ) year roof maintenance and program covering yearly roof inspections, proactive preventative maintenance and housekeeping of the roof as well as a 24 hour a day leak reporting response and tracking service. The specific areas covered shall be provided on the manufacturer’s sample agreement form.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
2.02 A.
ROOF SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Multi-ply Cold Process Modified Bitumen Built-up Roofing System: a. Tremco, Inc., or approved equal. ROOFING PLY MATERIALS Roofing base Ply Sheet: Trilaminate reinforced high strength ply sheet manufactured of polyester/fiberglass/polyester reinforcement carriers utilized by Tremco or approved equal. Thickness:
.048 in.
ASTM D 146-97
Tear Strength
345 lbf MD
ASTM D 4073
333 lbf/XMD Breaking strength
220 lbf/in MD
ASTM D 146-78
235 lbf/in XD B.
2.03 A.
ASTM 2523 – Testing Load Strain Properties of the Roofing Membrane MD
744 lbf. MD
XMD
761 lbf. XMD
FLASHING MATERIALS Flashing Sheet: 4 mil SBS mineral surfaced polyester reinforced flashing membrane by Tremco or approved equal.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 4
2.04
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
B.
Cold Process Modified Bitumen Adhesive: An environmentally friendly, low volatile, modified, cold process adhesive used in the construction of cold process built-up roofs manufactured by Tremco or approved equal.
2.05
AUXILIARY MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application.
C.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions of FM 4470; designed for fastening base sheets and base flashing and for back-nailing ply felts to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
D.
Wood Nailer Strips: Furnish wood nailer strips; fire retardant; pressure treated; size required, and complying with requirements of Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry."
E.
Cants: Perlite board, complying with ASTM C728.
F.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use.
G.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening thermal barrier to substrate.
2.06
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide preformed, roofing insulation boards that comply with requirements, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thickness indicated.
B.
Provide preformed, polyisocyanurate tapered insulation boards where indicated for sloping water to drainage outlets. Fabricate with the following taper: a. 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Minimum thickness, ¾ inch. 1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drainage outlets. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
C.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents complying with ASTM C1289, classified by facer type as follows: 1. Facer Type: Asphalt impregnated with organic/fiberglass facer. 2. Minimum bottom layer thickness: 2”.
D.
Asphalt impregnated fiberboard Cover Insulation Board: ASTM C-208 manufactured by Celotex or approved equal. Minimum top layer thickness: ½”.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 5
2.07
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Furnish roofing insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet roofing material.
B.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roofing insulation to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C.
Cover Board: Rigid, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, complying with ASTM C208, Type II, Grade 2, 1/2 inch thick.
D.
Insulation Adhesive: An environmentally friendly, UL approved solvent free, elastomeric adhesive for securing insulation to deck substrate.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01
ROOF INSTALLATION
A.
Verify conditions are satisfactory to receive work.
B.
Do not begin roofing until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions.
C.
Verify that work of other trades penetrating roof deck or requiring men and equipment to traverse roof deck has been approved by the Project Architect, manufacturer and roofing contractor.
D.
Check projections, curbs and deck for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture or unevenness that would prevent the quality and execution of a new roofing system.
3.02
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements.
B.
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are properly clamped into position.
C.
Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at roof penetrations and terminations and match the thicknesses of insulation required.
D.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. Prime walls with water based asphalt primer as specified by roof system manufacturer and allow to dry tack free.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is in the forecast.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 6
3.04
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install multi-ply cold process built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Cold Process Built-Up Roofing.
B.
Where roof slope exceeds 1 inch per 12 inches, run sheets of built-up roofing membrane parallel with slope. Backnail top ends of sheets to nailer strips.
C.
Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree cant strips at junctures of built-up roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.
D.
Cooperate with inspecting and testing agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing built-up roofing membrane system.
E.
Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
F.
Provide cutoffs at end of each day's work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed.
G.
Complete terminations and base flashing and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of the roofing system.
H.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.05
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roofing insulation.
B.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated Shop Drawings.
C.
Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
D.
Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install required thickness in 2 or more, layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
E.
Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush with ring of drain.
G.
Nailer Strips: Where roof slopes are greater than 1 inch per 12 inches, mechanically fasten to deck 4-inch nominal- wide, wood nailer strips of same thickness as insulation, spaced not more than 20 to 21 feet apart. Run nailers perpendicular to slope of roof.
H.
Install insulation with long joints of insulation in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
I.
Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
J.
Attachment of Insulation: Mechanically insulation to steel deck at one (1) fastener every two (2) sq. ft. Install additional fasteners to ensure board is firm under foot.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 7
K.
Install tapered insulation system, crickets and saddles between drains, where applicable, wall transitions and along high sides of curbs to divert water to drainage outlets. Set tapered panels in insulation adhesive.
L.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.06
ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Install ply felts according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply felts without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply felts uniformly to achieve required number of membrane plies throughout. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply felts over and terminate beyond cants.
B.
Install Three (3) plies of the specified trilaminate base ply in alternate applications of cold process modified adhesive applied strictly to manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty requirements.
C.
Application: Embed each ply felt in an application of cold process modified adhesive at the rate of 2 gallons per 100 sq. ft., to form a uniform membrane without ply felts touching each other. Where asphalt adhesive exudes out beyond the selvage edge, embed loose granules into adhesive.
D.
Membrane Walkways: Install another ply felt, approximately 36 inches wide and in lengths not exceeding 10 feet, leaving a space of 6 inches between strips. Adhere walkways in same type of material used to build up roof membrane.
3.07
FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
B.
Flashing Sheet Application: Shall be one of the methods below, as recommended by roofing manufacturer. 1. Adhere base and SBS flashing sheet to substrate in a solid application of sheeting adhesive. Ensure complete bond and continuity without wrinkles or voids. Lap sheeting ends four (4) inches. 2. Seal vertical edges of membrane with two (2) course of reinforcing membrane embedded between alternate applications of asphalt mastic. 3. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roof membrane and 4 inches onto field of roof membrane. 4. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. Seal top termination of base flashing.
C.
Install stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Built-up Stripping: Install stripping of not less than 2 plies, one (1) trilaminate base ply and one (1) SBS membrane , setting each ply in a continuous application of cold process adhesive, extended onto roof membrane 6 inches and 8 inches, respectively.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 8
E.
Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch lead metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed built-up roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping, extending a minimum of 4 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roof membrane. Clamp roof membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
F.
Stripping Material: Install not less than 2 plies of roof membrane felt, each set in a continuous coating of cold process adhesive.
G.
Install prefabricated roofing control (expansion) joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Expansion joint materials shall consist of 45 mil CSPE hypalon sheeting, 3” closed cell backer rod and nervastral vinyl barrier.
H.
At gas lines and equipment runners: All gas lines greater than 3” shall be resting on wood blocking and resting on ¼” steel plate and protection pad consisting of trilaminate base ply/walktred set in the specified adhesive. Spacing shall be 4’ o.c. Remaining piping smaller than 3” shall be resting on new 4 X 4 redwood runners and installed over trilaminate/walktred set in the specified adhesive.
3.08 A.
3.09
MEMBRANE PROTECTION LANDINGS Install walkway landings around access doors, ladders and working sides of mechanical equipment. Set landings in heavy pads of asphalt mastic. SURFACING TREATMENT
A.
Flood Coat: Prior to the application of the surface treatment system, the roof contractor shall inspect roof with the system manufacturer. All deficiencies found during this inspection shall be repaired immediately prior to this roof area being accepted.
B.
Over the entire roof membrane area apply a uniform and continuous flood coat of cold process adhesive at the rate of 7.5 gallons (60) lbs., per 100 sq. ft. Immediately broadcast a minimum of new, clean roofing aggregate per 100 sq. ft. Cover flood coat material completely.
C.
Coat flashing surface, lead, drain screens, galvanized metal, walktreds etc., with two (2) coats of aluminized heat reflective coating applied at the rate of 130 sq. ft., per gallon. Coat flashings neatly.
3.10 A.
B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Roofing manufacturer’s representative, roofing applicator, and Architect shall inspect work as follows: 1. Work in progress a minimum of two job visits per week with written field inspection reports on the roof contractors progress and quality of installation. Reports shall be submitted to the Project Architect. 2.
A pre-final inspection shall be conducted upon completion of all roofing ply sheets before flood coat and aggregate are applied.
3.
The final inspection will be performed by roofing manufacturer before issuance of Ten (10) year manufacturer’s preventative maintenance service agreement.
4.
Notify Architect minimum 48 hours in advance of manufacturer’s job visits.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace roof membrane that inspections and test reports indicate does not comply with specified requirements.
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 9
C.
Repair roof membrane that does not comply with specified requirements by re-adhering test specimens back in place and by applying additional plies, equal to the original number of plies specified, over test specimens according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Test Cuts: Before flood coating and surfacing built-up roofing membrane, test specimens will be removed to evaluate problems observed during quality-assurance inspections of roof membrane as follows: 1. Approximate quantities of components within roof membrane will be determined according to ASTM D3617. 2. Test specimens will be examined for interply voids according to ASTM D3617 and to comply with the criteria established in Appendix 3 of ARMA/NRCA'S "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing." 3. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, may be performed to determine that corrected Work complies with specified requirements.
E.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Project Architect.
F.
Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection.
3.11
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect built-up roofing membrane from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Project Architect.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove built-up roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair base flashing to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
END OF SECTION 07511
Muskogee Public Schools Master Roofing Specification
Page 10
SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Flashing.
B.
Counter flashings.
1.02 A. 1.03
RELATED SECTIONS Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. REFERENCES
A.
AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Stainless Steel - Uses in Architecture.
B.
ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate.
C.
ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality.
D.
ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality.
E.
FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric type Single Component.
F.
FS SS-C-00153 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic - Type 1.
G.
SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provision of Section 01300.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations and installations details.
C.
Submit samples in size illustrating metal finish color.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements.
B.
Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.06 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
SECTION 07600 PAGE 1
B.
Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending or abrasion and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C.
Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02
SHEET MATERIALS Galvanized Steel: ASTM 526 and ASTM 527 zinc coating min. 26 gage. ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers.
B.
Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous. Black color.
C.
Sealant: Specified in Section 07900.
D.
Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials used.
2.03
FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate to size, square and free from distortion or defects.
B.
Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet.
C.
Form pieces in 8 foot lengths.
D.
Hem exposed edges on undersize ½ inch; miter and seam corners.
E.
Form material with standing or flat lock seams.
F.
Pretin edges of copper sheet. Solder Shop formed metal joints. After soldering, remove, flux, wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints.
G.
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
H.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
2.05 A.
FINISH Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify roof opening, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place and nailing strips located.
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed and secure.
SECTION 07600 PAGE 2
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Conform to drawing details included in the SMACNA Manual.
B.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners.
C.
Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
E.
Seal metal joints watertight.
F.
Secure gutters and downspout in place using concealed fasteners.
G.
Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum.
H.
Seal metal joints watertight.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07600 PAGE 3
SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
SECTION INCLUDES Sealants as shown on the drawings and in other Sections. REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
B.
FS-TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric, One Component.
C.
FS-TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric, One Component.
D.
FS-TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Sealants
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Submit samples in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.04 A.
1.05 A.
1.06 A.
1.07 A. 1.08 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. QUALIFICATIONS Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum five year experience and approved by the manufacturer. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. COORDINATION Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this Section. WARRANTY Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
SECTION 07900 PAGE 1
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight seal, water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS The following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B. 2.02
2.03
Dow Corning Corporation General Electric Trenco, Inc. Pencora, Inc. Sonneborn Building Products Mameco International
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. EXTERIOR SEALANTS E-1:
Single Component polyurethane equal to ASTM C920 Type S, Class 25, Grade NS and FS-TT-S-00230 (c) Type II, Class A.
E-2:
Multi-Component, polyurethane equal to ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grade NS, FS-TT-S-00227 (c) Type II, Class A.
E-3:
Single Component polyurethane equal to ASTM C920 Type S, Class 25, Grade P and FS-TT-S-00230 (c) Type I, Class A.
E-4:
Multi-Component polyurethane equal to ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grade P and FS-TT-S-00227 (c) Type I, Class A.
E-5:
Low Modulus Silicone equal to ASTM C920 Type S, Class 25, Grade NS and FS-TT-S-001543 (c) Type II, Class A.
E-6:
Medium Modulus Silicone equal to ASTM C920 Type S, Class NS and FS-TT-S-oo1543 (c) Type II, Class A.
INTERIOR SEALANTS I-1:
Single Component acrylic-latex equal to ASTM C-736-82.
I-2:
One Component, acoustical sealant, non-drying, non-hardening, non-paintable.
I-3:
Mildew Resistant silicone sealant equal to ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS and FS-TT-S-00230, Type II, Class A.
SECTION 07900 PAGE 2
1.04
ACCESSORIES A-1:
Closed cell polyurethane foam rod.
A-2:
Open cell polyurethane foam rod.
A-3:
Non-staining solvent base primer.
A-4:
Epoxy primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C.
Install backer rod with joint tools, maintaining a uniform depth.
D.
Apply primer a recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges and sags.
G.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H.
Dry tool joints. Do not use soap and water.
3.04 A.
CLEANING Clean work under provisions of Section 01700
SECTION 07900 PAGE 3
B. 3.05 A. B. 3.06 A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. Protect sealants until cured. SCHEDULE Vertical sealants for concrete and masonry. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Vertical sealants for perimeter weatherseal on windows and doors. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
E-1 E-2 E-6 A-1 A-2 A-3
Interior sealants for drywall to window and door frames. 1. 2. 3.
E.
E-1 E-2 E-6 A-1 A-2 A-3
Horizontal sealants for sidewalks, pavers, interior tile, etc. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
D.
E-1 E-2 E-5 E-6 A-1 A-2
I-1 A-1 A-3
Interior sealants for fixtures and vanities. 1. 2. 3.
I-3 A-1 A-3 END OF SECTION
SECTION 07900 PAGE 4
SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Standard Hollow metal doors with flush faces.
B.
Standard Hollow metal frames for doors and/or windows.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09900 - Painting
B.
Section 08700 - Hardware
C. Section 08800 - Glass & Glazing 1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B.
Door Hardware Institute
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Submit under provision of Section 01300. QUALITY ASSURANCE Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
DOOR MANUFACTURERS Acceptable manufacturers: Provided their products meet or exceed requirements of the specification. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Elco Overly Trussbilt Ceco Corp. Curries Mfg. Inc. Amweld Building Products Div.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
SECTION 08100 PAGE 1
2.02
HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
Exterior Door: SDI Level 2 - Model 1, 1 3/4 inch (level A) Model 2, Seamless Composite Construction; # 16 gauge galvanized steel. Core: Urethane minimum of R=11.25 bonded to steel. Flush design.
B.
Interior Doors: SDI Level 2 - Model 1, 1 3/4 inch (Level B) Model 2, Seamless Composite; #18 gage material.
C.
Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100 except as amended in this Section.
D.
Design: Flush
2.03
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100 except as amended in this section.
B.
Welded Type Frames: 1. 2.
C.
Exterior: 16 gage galvanealed steel Interior: 16 gage cold rolled steel
Drywall Type Frames 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Metal: 16 gage cold rolled steel. Mitered Joints only. Construction: Cold-rolled steel. 2 inch face and wrap-around edge for flat bearing against wall construction. Mitered corners reinforced with snap lock type corner clip providing firm interlocking of jambs to head. Reinforcing: 3/16 inch steel for hinges, closures, strikes and others reqd. Plumbing anchor mechanism: Concealed apparatus capable of plumbing door frame after frame is in place (if frame is to be installed after wall is up.).
D. All frames set in masonry walls are to be face welded and ground smooth, and re-primed at the welded area. E.
Plaster Guard Boxes: Minimum 26 gage, welded in place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation.
F.
Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement. 1.
2.04
Single Doors: 3 inch strike jamb.
FABRICATION OF DOORS
A.
Mechanically interlock longitudal seams of honeycomb core type doors. Leave seams invisible or weld, fill and grind smooth.
B.
Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.
C.
Attach fire rated label to each door unit.
D.
Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with flush end closure. Seal joints watertight.
SECTION 08100 PAGE 2
E.
Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
F.
Touch up areas where galvanized coating has been removed due to sanding or handling.
G.
Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
2.05
FABRICATION OF FRAMES
A.
Accurately form and cut mitered corner of welded type frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform surface.
B.
Accurately form interlocking joints of drywall frames to maintain alignment of parts when field assembled.
C.
Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware in accordance with final hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier.
D.
Provide jamb anchors (SDI-100).
E.
Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth finish.
F.
Touch up areas where galvanized coating has been removed due to sanding or handling.
G.
Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
H.
Furnish removable spacer at bottom of door frames. Space is to be removed before setting frames.
2.06
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Wall anchors for frame attachment to masonry construction: Masonry anchors, adjustable, flat, corrugated or perforated >T= shaped anchors with leg not less than 2 inches (50) wide by 10 inches (254) long or masonry Awire@ type not less than 3/16 inch (5) diameter.
B.
Wall anchors for attachment to drywall partitions: 1. 2.
Use manufacturer=s adjustable type compression anchors at drywall locations. Use steel or wood stud anchors sized to accommodate frame jamb depth and face dimension on all welded frames.
C.
All frame jamb anchors to be provided; one each jamb per 30 inches (762) of frame height or fraction thereof.
D.
Floor anchors: Angle clip type 1. 2. 3.
E.
16 ga. (1.4) minimum. To receive 2 fasteners per jamb. Welded to the bottom of each jamb.
In place masonry or concrete: 1. 2.
3/8 inch (9.5) countersunk flat head stove bolt and expansion shields. Weld pipe spacers or other type of spacers per manufacturer=s standard design in back of frame soffit to protect frame profile during tightening of bolts and anchors. SECTION 08100 PAGE 3
F.
Head struts: For frames not anchored to masonry or concrete construction provide ceiling struts spot welded to jambs each side extending to building structure where called for on schedule.
G.
Preparation for hardware 1.
Reinforcement: Reinforce components for hardware installation in accordance with ANSI A250.6-1997.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
SETTING FRAMES
A.
Set all frames in accordance with SDI 105-92.
B.
Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work. Brace frames until permanent anchors are set.
C.
Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and strike levels.
D.
Use temporary setting spreaders at all locations. Use intermediate spreaders to assure proper door clearances and header braces for grouted frames.
E.
Install frames in prepared openings in concrete and masonry walls using countersunk bolts and expansion shields.
F.
Install all drywall frames plumb and true.
G.
Install all fire rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA-80-1995.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Install hollow metal doors in frames using hardware specified in Section 08700 Finish Hardware.
B.
Clearances at edge of doors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch (3.2). At meeting edges pairs of doors and at mullions: 1/8 inch (3.2). At transom panels, without transom bars: 1/8 inch (3.2). At sills without thresholds: 5/8 inch (15.9) maximum above finish floor. At sills with thresholds: 1/8 inch (3.2) above threshold.
3.03
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A.
Remove dirt and excess sealants, mortar or glazing compounds from exposed surfaces.
B.
Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. Use shims if necessary to allow for proper closing.
C.
Fill all dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces Reprime/paint to match finish.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08100 PAGE 4
SECTION 08340 - TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
WORK INCLUDED A.
Section includes: 1. Tornado resistant door set for Safe Room/ Tornado Shelter to include: a. Extra heavy duty Hollow Metal Steel Doors b. Hollow Metal Frames c. Tornado Resistant Door Hardware Schedule
B.
Related Documents: 1. The Contract Documents, as defined in Document Division 01 General Conditions and modifications thereto, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.
C.
Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section “Concrete Unit Masonry.” 2. Division 04 Section “CMU Masonry Veneer.” 3. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.” 4. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”. 5. Division 09 Section “Paints and Stains.”
1.2
REFERENCES A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI 115 - Door and Hardware Preparation.
B.
American National Standards Institute/ Steel Door Institute (ANSI/SDI) 1. ANSI/SDI-100 - Steel Door Institute (Latest edition).
C.
Federal Emergency Management Administration (FEMA) 1. FEMA 361 - Design and Construction Guidance for Community Shelters.
D.
International Code Congress/ National Storm Shelter Association (ICC/NSSA) 1. ICC-500 – ICC/NSSA Standard on the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters.
E.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA-80 - Fire Doors and Windows (Latest edition). 2. NFPA-101 - Life Safety Codes (Latest edition).
F.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL10B - Fire Testing. 2. UL FEMA 361 Certification Program.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A.
Provide per Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”.
TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS
08340-1
B.
Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose products are used in conjunction with the Hollow Metal Doors and Frames under Division 09, and Door Hardware Division 08.
C.
Doors and Frames will be prepared for (only) specific hardware as tested and independently certified by system manufacturer.
D.
The Tornado Resistant Door, Frame and Hardware System supplier shall use the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings Submittal shall include the following information: 1. List every item included in the construction of each Tornado Resistant Door Assembly 2. Product data sheets 3. Test data and certifications 4. Shop drawings 5. Door schedule 6. Frame Schedule 7. Finish hardware schedule 8. Door set installation guide
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition).
B.
Tornado resistant Doors and Frames shall be manufactured to high quality standards in manufacturing facilities with annual certified conformance to ISO9001.
C.
Hardware supplier shall be a qualified, Factory Authorized, direct distributor of the products to be furnished. In addition, the supplier shall have in their regular employment an A.H.C. or person of equivalent experience who will be made available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect, Contractor and/or Owner regarding any matters affecting the finish hardware on this project.
D.
Testing: Tornado resistant door set shall be tested with door, frame, and hardware to be in compliance with UL FEMA 361 Certification Program. Submit test data with shop drawing submittals.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the schedule.
B.
Deliver all steel doors with corrugated edge protection and palletized to provide protection during transit and job storage.
C.
Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided the repair is equal to new work and acceptable to the Architect.
D.
Store doors and frames at the job site under cover. Place units on wood sills on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet,
TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS
08340-2
remove the carton immediately. Provide a ¼ inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. E.
Furnish all hardware with each unit clearly marked and numbered in accordance with the hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each.
F.
Pack each item complete with all necessary parts and fasteners.
G.
Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches and dents during delivery and storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
Tornado Resistant Doors are tested as an assembly. Provide doors, frames and hardware as a complete package meeting the tested assembly.
B.
ASSA ABLOY Door Group Stormpro 361: 1. Curries 2. Ceco Door
C.
Steelcraft “Paladin” System Tornado Resistant Door
D.
Hardware: 1. Sargent as specified in Division 08 “Door Hardware” and as tested with assemblies described above.
2.2
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES FOR SHELTER ENTRY A.
Shelter entry doors and their frames shall resist the design wind pressures for components and cladding as described in Section 1 and the missile impact loads of Section 2 of the National Performance Criteria for Tornado Shelters Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) Mitigation Directorate, latest edition. Only single opening and paired opening doors, their frames, and hardware assemblies that can resist calculated design wind pressures and laboratory tested missile impacts are acceptable.
B.
All doors have sufficient points of connection to their frame to resist design wind pressure and impact loads.
C.
All doors and hardware will be scheduled and installed as part of the door/frame/hardware package certified by independent third-party testing per references in paragraph 1.2.F or other FEMA independent testing agency, and will be clearly labeled as a FEMA 361 certified product.
2.3
MATERIAL A.
Sheets are to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60.
TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS
08340-3
B.
Vertical edges will join the face sheets by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground and filled to make them invisible and provide a smooth flush surface.
C.
Hinge reinforcement to be not less than 7 guage (3/16”) plate 1-1/4” x 9” prepared for 4 ½ x 4 ½ x .180 hinges.
D.
Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with an inverted continuous steel channel not less than 16 gage, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors shall have a steel closure channel welded in place so the web of the channel is flush with the top of the face sheets of the door. Plastic fillers are NOT acceptable.
E.
Door Performance: 1. Doors are to be completely filled with 2.0 density rigid foamed-in-place polyurethane core chemically bonded to all interior surfaces with a minimum insulation value of R9. 2. Door systems, both single doors and paired openings, shall be tested and must comply with the FEMA 361 Design and Construction Guidance for Community Shelters and have available verifiable third party conformance test results and certification through agencies such as: UL, Intertek and Warnock-Hersey.
2.4
STEEL FRAMES A.
Materials: 1. 14 gage hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60. 2. All frames are to be assembled so that the face miter seam is “closed and tight”. Weld the face seam, grind and dress the weld area smooth. Apply a zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 3. Frame assembly for both single doors and paired openings, shall be tested and must comply with the FEMA 361 Design and Construction Guidance for Community Shelters and have available verifiable third party conformance test results.
B.
Fabrication: 1. Provide steel frames for doors to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings. 2. All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects. 3. Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on approved shop drawings. 4. Hardware reinforcements shall be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. 5. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for template mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only, all drilling and tapping to be done in the field by others. 6. Hinge reinforcement to be not less than 7 gage (3/16”) plate prepared for 4 ½ x 4 ½ x .180 hinges.
C.
Anchors: 1. Anchors for masonry walls to be of the masonry “T” type. Quantity of anchors installed as required for system performance.
TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS
08340-4
2. 3.
4. 2.5
Dust boxes/mortar guards to be no less than 26 gage. All frames that are to be welded are to have a steel spreader during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening. Punch the stop for 3 silencers on single door and 2 on double door frames.
PRIME FINISH A.
2.6
Door and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting primer. The finish to meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces”. The prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of paint to be provided in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For specialty types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted. HARDWARE
A.
Hardware locations: Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the system manufacturer’s specific location.
B.
General reinforcements: Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100
C.
Hardware preparation: Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. 1. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, or drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be done by others in the field.
D.
Fasteners: 1. Furnish with finish hardware all necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for a long life under hard use. 2. Fasteners shall be stainless steel.
E.
Hinges: 1. Unless otherwise specified, provide five-knuckle, heavy-duty, button tip, full mortise type butt hinges with non-rising loose pins. Provide non-removable pins for out swinging doors at secured areas or as called for in this specification. 2. Exterior Exposure Hinges: Stainless-steel fabrication with stainless steel fasteners as attachment to frames.
F.
Exit Devices And Multi-Point FEMA Locksets 1. Exit devices BHMA certified to ANSI A156.3 Grade 1; FEMA multi-point devices certified FEMA 361 and UL Laboratories (as assembly with frame and door).
TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS
08340-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION A.
It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given to the steel door and frame manufacturer are accurate.
B.
It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to assure that scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibitive primer.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION A.
Frames: 1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions. 2. Fill frame jambs and head with mortar and install per manufacturers specific system installation instructions. 3. SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames” and SDI-110 “Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction” shall indicate the proper installation procedures.
B.
Doors: 1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-110, maximum door undercut shall be 3/8”. 3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 4. Install Doors per manufacturer’s specific system installation instructions. 5. “Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware” published by DHI is recommended for further details.
C.
Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s templates and instructions. TORNADO RESISTANT DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Refer to Division 08 Door Hardware for Tornado Resistant Door Hardware Schedule.
END OF SECTION
TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS
08340-6
SECTION 08582 SERVICE WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1
SECTION INCLUDES A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Flush mount pass-thru windows.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
B.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealants..
REFERENCES A.
ASTM A 240 - Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
B.
ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C.
ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
D.
ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
E.
ASTM B 580 - Standard Specification for Anodic Oxide Coatings on Aluminum.
F.
ASTM B 680 - Standard Test Method for Seal Quality of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum by Acid Dissolution.
G.
ASTM C 1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
H.
ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
I.
ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
J.
Aluminum Association AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, glazing, fasteners, hardware, finish, electrical wiring diagrams, options, and accessories.
SERVICE WINDOWS
08582-1
1.5
1.6
D.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual, including operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning instructions, trouble shooting guide, parts list, and electrical wiring diagrams.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 25 years successful experience continuously manufacturing pass-thru windows.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have five years experience manufacturing and fabricating windows of similar type and scope as those specified in this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer until ready for installation.
B.
Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors until ready for installation.
C.
Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS A.
Basis of Design: Design based on aluminum (SCDW) series, self closing deluxe sliding service window - Model - CRL SCDW1802. Manufacturer C. R. Laurence Co., Inc. (800-421-6144) WWW.CRLAURENCE.COM .
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01630.
FLUSH MOUNTED PASS-THRU WINDOWS A.
Double Panel Pass-Thru Windows: Ready Access 275 Series Single Panel Pass-Thru Window with optional Stainless Steel with water dam custom size. Refer to plans for sill size. 1. Opening: a. Custom Size: Refer to plans for widows and transom sizes. 2. Door Operation: a. Manual Open/Self Close. 3. Door Type: Sliding, 1 door panel operable other panel fixed. 4. Opening Direction: a. Right to left from outside (customers view). Refer to plans for
SERVICE WINDOWS
08582-2
location. Left to right from outside (customers view). Refer to plans for location. Frame: Extruded aluminum, ÅSTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6 and 6063-T52. Aluminum Sheet: ÅSTM B 209, Alloy 5005-AQ-H34. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ÅSTM A 653, G90. Bottom Sill: Optional Stainless Steel with water dam custom size. Refer to plans Manual Security Lock: Thumb turn hook lock. Security Bar Set: Additional security bar for additional after hours security. Fasteners: Stainless steel rivets and hex-head zinc-plated self-threading machine screws. Handle: Black Delrin handle with pressed-in stainless steel spring pins. Stainless steel handle mounting bracket. Stainless steel spring-loaded mounting base. Glazing: a. 1/2-inch (12 mm) tinted tempered glass, ASTM C 1048. Silicone Glazing Sealant: Dow Corning 999A: Finish: a. Anodized Aluminum - Color clear anodized b.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
13. 14. 15.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine openings and areas to receive pass-thru windows for substrate conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.
B.
If openings or substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Ensure openings to receive pass-thru windows are plumb, level, square, accurately aligned, correctly located, and in tolerance.
INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install pass-thru windows plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work.
C.
Install thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.
SERVICE WINDOWS
08582-3
3.4
3.5
3.6
D.
Install pass-thru window components weathertight.
E.
Anchor pass-thru windows securely in place to supports. Use attachment methods permitting adjustment for construction tolerances, irregularities, alignment, and expansion and contraction.
F.
Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect.
G.
Coordinate installation of related sheet metal flashing as specified in Section 07600.
H.
Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 07920.
I.
Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect.
J.
Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust doors to be weathertight in closed position.
B.
Adjust doors and operating hardware to function properly and for smooth operation without binding.
CLEANING A.
Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Clean pass-thru windows promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Remove excess joint sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glazing or finish.
PROTECTION A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Protect installed pass-thru windows to ensure that, except for normal weathering, pass-thru windows will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
C.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
SERVICE WINDOWS
08582-4
SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Hardware for wood, hollow steel and aluminum doors.
B.
Thresholds.
C.
Weatherstripping, seals and door gasket.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Cabinet hardware.
B.
Section 08100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
C.
Section 08211 - Wood Doors.
D.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrance & Storefront
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
B.
NPPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
C.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute - Quality Standards.
D.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Building Structures.
E.
NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F.
UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
G.
UL 305 - Panic Hardware.
H.
ADA - American with Disabilities Act
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C.
Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.
D.
Manufacturer's installation instruction: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. SECTION 08700 PAGE 1
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700
B.
Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code.
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1.07 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1.
ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
B.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.
C.
Deliver two (2) sets of keys to Owner.
1.09 A.
1.10
COORDINATION Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL
A.
Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700.
B.
Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware components.
C.
Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware components manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer and type as shown on Schedule.
B.
Substitutions: Under Provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 A.
KEYING Door Locks: Master Keyed with existing system.
SECTION 08700 PAGE 2
B.
Supply keys in the following quantities: 1. 2. 3. 4.
(2) Master Keys. (2) Great Grand Master Keys. (2) Construction Keys. (2) Control Keys.
PART 3 EXECUTION A.
3.02
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1.
3.03 A. 3.04
In accordance with A.D.A. requirements.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.05
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B
Do not permit adjacent Work to damage hardware or finish.
END OF SECTION (SCHEDULE FOLLOWS)
SECTION 08700 PAGE 3
MUSKOGEE PUBLIC SCHOOLS CENTRAL SERVER SAFE ROOM & OFFICES Must be factory keyed to an existing Sargent SIGNATURE restricted grand master key system for Muskogee P.S. SET 1 Door # 100 Each pair to have: 5 ea. Hinges 1 ea. Electric Transfer Hinge 2 ea. Reinforcing Pivot 1 ea. Lockable Removable Mullion 1 ea. Mortise Cylinder Kit 1 ea. Rim Exit Device 1 ea. Harmony Rim Exit Device 2 ea. Flush Pull 2 ea. Closer 2 ea. Kick Plate 1 ea. Threshold 1 set Weatherstrip 1 ea. Mullion Seal 2 ea. Sweep 1 ea. Drip Cap
T4A3786 4.5" x 4.5" NRP T4A3786 QC-12 4.5" x 4.5" NRP B1923 L980 980C1 10-8804 F less trim [key every time] 10-56-H2-8804 less trim 94 351-CPS K1050 10" x 34" x .050" 171A ½“ x 5” x 72" 303AV 1-72" x 2-84" 5110 BL 120" 315CN 36" 346C 76"
USP USP US2G USP US26D US32D US32D US32D EN US32D AL AL --US28 US28
600 600 603 AL 626 630 630 613 689 630 719 719 --628 628
McKinney McKinney Markar Sargent Sargent Sargent Sargent * Rockwood Sargent Rockwood Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko
*NOTE: Weigand controlled electrified hardware. Access control provided in Section 17600. SET 2 Door # 110 Each pair to have: 6 ea. Hinges 2 ea. Flush Bolt 1 ea. Dust Proof Strike 1 ea. Storeroom Lockset 1 ea. Closer 2 ea. Armor Plate 1 ea. Overhead Stop 1 ea. Threshold 1 set Weatherstrip 2 ea. Sweep 1 ea. Astragal 1 ea. Drip Cap
TA2714 4.5" x 4.5" NRP 555 570 10-21-28-10G04 LL [key every time] 351-CPS [active leaf] K1050 34" x 35" x .050" 598 S [inactive leaf] 171A ½“ x 5” x 72" 303AV 1-72" x 2-84" 315CN 36" 355CS 84" 346C 76"
USP US26D US26D US26D EN US32D US26D AL AL US28 US28 US28
600 626 626 626 689 630 626 719 719 628 628 628
McKinney Rockwood Rockwood Sargent Sargent Rockwood Sargent Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko
USP US2G US32D US32D EN US32D AL AL US28 US28
600 603 630 613 689 630 719 719 628 628
McKinney Markar Sargent Rockwood Sargent Rockwood Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko
SET 3 Door # 106, 109 Each door to have: 3 ea. Hinges 1 ea. Reinforcing Pivot 1 ea. Rim Exit Device 1 ea. Flush Pull 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Kick Plate 1 ea. Threshold 1 set Weatherstrip 1 ea. Sweep 1 ea. Drip Cap
T4A3786 B1923 10-8804 F less trim 94 351-CPS K1050 171A 303AV 315CN 346C
4.5" x 4.5" NRP [key every time]
10" x 34" x .050" ½“ x 5” x 36" 1-36" x 2-84" 36" 40"
Page 1 of 3
MUSKOGEE PUBLIC SCHOOLS CENTRAL SERVER SAFE ROOM & OFFICES SET 4 Door # 108A Each door to have: 3 ea. Hinges w/ stainless steel screws T4A3786 4.5" x 4.5" NRP US26D 652 McKinney 1 ea. Reinforcing Pivot B1923 US2G 603 Markar 1 ea. FEMA SVR Exit Device 10-21-FM8710 36" x 84" [exit only] US32D 630 Sargent 1 ea. Closer 281-CPS EN 689 Sargent 1 ea. Kick Plate K1050 10" x 34" x .050" US32D 630 Rockwood 1 ea. Threshold 171A ½“ x 5” x 36" AL 719 Pemko 1 set Weatherstrip 303AV 1-36" x 2-84" AL 719 Pemko 1 ea. Sweep 315CN 36" US28 628 Pemko 1 ea. Drip Cap 346C 40" US28 628 Pemko NOTE: Hardware must be used on Curries Storm Pro 361 door and frame to comply with FEMA 361 HM Door: 14 gauge face skins spot-welded to ribs w/ 20 gauge vertically steel stiffened core HM Frame: 14 gauge w/ welded joints SET 5 Door # 108B Each pair to have: 6 ea. Hinges TA2714 4.5" x 4.5" US26D 652 McKinney 6 ea. Hinges w/ stainless steel screws T4A3786 4.5" x 4.5" NRP US26D 652 McKinney 2 ea. FEMA SVR Exit Device 21-FM8704 ETL 36" x 84" [key every time] US32D 630 Sargent 2 ea. Closer 281-PS EN 689 Sargent 2 ea. Kick Plate K1050 10" x 35" x .050" US32D 630 Rockwood 2 ea. Mop Plate K1050 6" x 35" x .050" US32D 630 Rockwood 2 ea. Silencers 608 GREY Rockwood NOTE: Hardware must be used on Curries Storm Pro 361 door and frame to comply with FEMA 361 HM Door: 14 gauge face skins spot-welded to ribs w/ 20 gauge vertically steel stiffened core HM Frame: 14 gauge w/ welded joints SET 6 Door # 103 Each pair to have: 6 ea. Hinges 2 ea. Flush Bolt 1 ea. Dust Proof Strike 1 ea. Classroom Lockset 2 ea. Closer 2 ea. Kick Plate 2 ea. Mop Plate 2 ea. Wall Stop 2 ea. Silencers
TA2714 555 570 21-28-10G37 LL 1431-P9 K1050 K1050 406 608
4.5" x 4.5"
US26D US26D US26D [key locks/unlocks] US26D EN 10" x 35" x .050" US32D 6" x 35" x .050" US32D US32D GREY
652 626 626 626 689 630 630 630
McKinney Rockwood Rockwood Sargent Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood
4.5" x 4.5"
652 626 626 626 689 630 630
McKinney Rockwood Rockwood Sargent Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood
SET 7 Door # 109A Each pair to have: 6 ea. Hinges 2 ea. Flush Bolt 1 ea. Dust Proof Strike 1 ea. Classroom Lockset 2 ea. Closer 2 ea. Kick Plate 2 ea. Mop Plate 2 ea. Silencers
TA2714 555 570 21-28-10G37 LL 1431-PS K1050 K1050 608
US26D US26D US26D [key locks/unlocks] US26D EN 10" x 35" x .050" US32D 6" x 35" x .050" US32D GREY
Page 2 of 3
MUSKOGEE PUBLIC SCHOOLS CENTRAL SERVER SAFE ROOM & OFFICES SET 8 Door # 108 Each door to have: 3 ea. Hinges w/ stainless steel screws T4A3786 4.5" x 4.5" NRP US26D 652 McKinney 1 ea. FEMA SVR Exit Device 21- H2-FM8713 ETL 36" x 84" US32D 630 Sargent * 1 ea. Closer 281-PS EN 689 Sargent 1 ea. Kick Plate K1050 10" x 34" x .050" US32D 630 Rockwood 1 ea. Mop Plate K1050 6" x 35" x .050" US32D 630 Rockwood 3 ea. Silencers 608 GREY Rockwood NOTE: Hardware must be used on Curries Storm Pro 361 door and frame to comply with FEMA 361 HM Door: 14 gauge face skins spot-welded to ribs w/ 20 gauge vertically steel stiffened core HM Frame: 14 gauge w/ welded joints *NOTE: Weigand controlled electrified hardware. Access control provided in Section 17600. SET 9 Door # 101 Each door to have: 3 ea. Hinges 1 ea. Entrance Lockset 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Kick Plate 1 ea. Mop Plate 1 ea. Wall Stop 3 ea. Silencers
TA2714 21-28-10G05 LL 1431-O K1050 K1050 409 608
4.5" x 4.5" US26D 652 [turn button inside] US26D 626 EN 689 10" x 34" x .050" US32D 630 6" x 35" x .050" US32D 630 US32D 630 GREY
McKinney Sargent Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood
4.5" x 4.5" [turn button inside] 10" x 34" x .050" 6" x 35" x .050"
626
McKinney Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood
4.5" x 4.5" US26D 652 [key locks/unlocks] US26D 626 EN 689 10" x 34" x .050" US32D 630 6" x 35" x .050" US32D 630 US26D 626 GREY
McKinney Sargent Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Sargent Rockwood
4.5" x 4.5" [push button]
McKinney Sargent Sargent Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood Rockwood
SET 10 Door # 102, 104, 105, 107 Each door to have: 3 ea. Hinges 1 ea. Entrance Lockset 1 ea. Kick Plate 1 ea. Mop Plate 1 ea. Wall Stop 3 ea. Silencers 1 ea. Double Coat Hook
TA2714 21-28-10G05 LL K1050 K1050 409 608 796
1.125” projection
US26D US26D US32D US32D US32D GREY US26D
652 626 630 630 630
SET 11 Door # 111 Each door to have: 3 ea. Hinges 1 ea. Classroom Lockset 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Kick Plate 1 ea. Mop Plate 1 ea. Overhead Stop 3 ea. Silencers
TA2714 21-28-10G37 LL 1431-O K1050 K1050 1548 S 608 SET 12
Door # 112, 113 Each door to have: 3 ea. Hinges 1 ea. Privacy Latchset 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Kick Plate 1 ea. Mop Plate 1 ea. Wall Stop 3 ea. Silencers 1 ea. Double Coat Hook
TA2714 SG-28-10U65 LL 1431-O x DA K1050 K1050 409 608 796
10" x 34" x .050" 6" x 35" x .050"
1.125” projection
US26D US26D EN US32D US32D US32D GREY US26D
652 626 689 630 630 630 626
END OF HARDWARE SETS Page 3 of 3
SECTION 08740 GOVERNMENT KEY BOX PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. 1.04
SECTION INCLUDES High Security Government Key Box RELATED SECTIONS Section 08700 - Hardware REFERENCES NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Building Structures. SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Manufacturer's installation instruction: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.05 A.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Submit under provisions of Section 01700
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer and type: Knox-Box, 3200 Series as manufactured by Knox Company, Phoenix ,AR (800) 552-5669
[email protected]
B.
Substitutions: Under Provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 A.
PRODUCT Description: 1. Dimensions: Recessed mount flange 7”H x 7”W 2. Lock: UL Listed. Double-action rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by a baised cut Key. 3. Finish: Factory 4. Color: Aluminum 5. Model: 3200 Series KNOX-BOX 6. Recessed Mounting Kit (RMK)
SECTION 08740 PAGE 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 A. 3.03 A. 3.04 A.
3.05
INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. ADJUSTING Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B
Do not permit adjacent Work to damage hardware or finish.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08740 PAGE 2
SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.02
Glass and glazing Sections referencing this Section for products and installation. RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
B.
Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Mirrors.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
B.
ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings.
C.
ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
D.
FNMA - Glazing Manual.
E.
SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturer's Association.
1.04 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1.
1.05
In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data on Glass Types Specified: 1.
Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D.
Samples: Submit samples, in size, illustrating glass units, coloration and design.
E.
Samples: Submit 6 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
SECTION 08800 PAGE 1
F. 1.06 A. 1.07 A. 1.08 A.
1.09
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with FNMA Glazing Manual. FIELD MEASUREMENTS Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. COORDINATION Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. WARRANTY
A.
Provide ten year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting and replacement of same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS - FLAT GLASS MATERIALS 1. 2.
2.02
PPG, Inc. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
FLAT GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Float Glass: Q3 quality; 1/4 inch thick: Clear - for interior use, Tinted - for exterior use.
B.
Insulated Glass Units - Float Glass: Double pane units outer pane of tinted green float glass, inner pane of clear float glass. Total unit thickness of 1 inch.
C.
Tempered Glass Q3 quality: Class 1, 1/4 inch thick: Clear - for interior use, Tinted - for exterior use.
D.
Insulated Glass - Tempered Glass: Double pane units with outer pane of tinted float glass; inner pane of clear glass. Total unit thickness of 7/8 inch.
E.
Mirror Glass (Type FG-H): Unframed, clear float type with copper and silver coating, organic over coating, square and lapped edges, 1/4 inch thick minimum.
F.
Submit samples of tint color options to Architect during submittal phase. Tint color will be selected from manufacturer’s standard tint colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
SECTION 08800 PAGE 2
3.01 A. B.
3.02
EXAMINATION Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized within tolerance. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recessed are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install glass to FNMA requirements appropriate for types of applications and conditions of use.
B.
Set glass on setting blocks as recommended by manufacturer.
3.04
INSTALLATION - MIRRORS
A.
Set mirrors with adhesive applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Place plumb and level.
3.05
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Inspector will monitor quality of glazing.
3.06
CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
C.
Remove labels after work is complete.
D.
Clean glass and mirrors.
3.07
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provision of Section 01500.
B.
After installation, mark pane with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08800 PAGE 3
SECTION 09000 FINISH SELECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
WORK INCLUDED
RELATED SECTIONS
A. B. C. D. E.
Paint Rubber Base Carpet Porcelain Tile Porcelain Tile Base
Section 09900 Paint Section 09650 Resilient Flooring Section 09680 Carpet Section 09300 Tile Section 09300 Tile
1.02
COLOR SELECTIONS
A.
Paint (P) P1 – Not used P2 – Sherwin Williams, SW 6361, Autumnal, Egg Shell Finish P3 – Sherwin Williams, SW 6480, Lagoon, Egg Shell Finish P4 – Sherwin Williams, SW 6453, Cilantro, Egg Shell Finish P5 – Sherwin Williams, SW7056, Reserved White, Egg Shell Finish
B.
Rubber Base (RB) RB – Johnsonite, 4”, 40 Black
C.
Carpet (CPT) CPT – Shaw Contract Group, Disperse Tile 59576, Magnetic Fields 75505, Quarter-Turn Installation
D.
Glazed Porcelain Tile (T) T1 – American Olean, Urban Tones, Designer White Salt & Pepper R980, 12x12 Field Tile
E.
Tile Base (TB) TB – American Olean, Urban Tones, Black R961, Surface Bullnose P4669, 6x6
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09000 PAGE 1
SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Gypsum sheathing
B.
Gypsum board
C.
Metal Stud Framing
D.
Taped and sanded joint treatment
E.
Acoustical insulation
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking
B.
Section 09900 - Painting
C.
Section 07210 - Batt and Blanket Insulation
D.
Section 08100 - Standard Steel Frames
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard
B.
ASTM C4 75 - Joint Treatment Materials
C.
ASTM C754 - Installation of framing members to receive screw attached gypsum board.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape batten.
1.05 A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with UL and FM.
SECTION 09260 PAGE 1
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
A.
Acceptable manufacturers: 1. United States Gypsum Board 2. Gold Bond Building Products, National Gypsum 3. Georgia-pacific Corp. 4. G-P Gypsum
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 A.
FRAMING MATERIALS Studs and Tracks: GA-216; galvanized sheet steel. 1. 2.
Interior Framing: 18 gauge C-shape, with knurled faces, size as indicated on drawings. Exterior Framing: Size 18 gauge as indicated on drawings..
B.
Fasteners, Furring, Framing, Adhesive and Accessories: GA-216
C.
Anchorage to substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws , and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
2.03
GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges.
B.
Gypsum Sheathing Board; ASTM C70; moisture resistant and fire resistant type; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges; water repellant paper faces.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A.
Corner Beads: Metal
B.
Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; exposed reveal bead.
C.
Joint Materials: GA 201 and GA 216; Reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.
D.
Fasteners: ASTM C1002, and S12 and GA-216.
E.
Special control joints labeled as “Reveal Channel Screed” on interior elevations: #DCS-625-200 by Fry Reglet www.fryreglet.com
SECTION 09260 PAGE 2
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02
EXAMINATION Verify that conditions are ready to receive work. METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A.
Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Metal Stud Spacing: 6" studs 16 inches on center. 3-5/8" or smaller 16 inches on center Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs.
C.
D. 3.03
Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to studs as needed for applications. WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block walls.
B.
Erect free-standing stud framing tight to concrete masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.04
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 216 and manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.
C.
Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
D.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring or framing.
E.
Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.05
JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.
B.
Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/16 inch.
C.
Tape joints and corners of cementitious backing board.
3.06 A.
ACOUSTICAL INSTALLATION Place acoustical insulating in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions and tight to items passing through partitions. SECTION 09260 PAGE 3
B.
Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Install sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: 1.
3.07 A.
Calk all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ductwork, and rough-in boxes.
TOLERANCES Maximum variation of finished gypsum board surface from true flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09260 PAGE 4
SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
SECTION INCLUDES Ceramic floor tile and tile base REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
B.
ANSI/TCA A108.6 - Ceramic Tile installed with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy.
C.
ANSI/TCA A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
D.
ANSI/TCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
E.
TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
C.
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
D.
Include recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, and cleaning materials.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1
B.
Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.06 A.
1.07
QUALIFICATIONS Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience approved by product manufacturer. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
SECTION 09300 PAGE 1
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment.
B.
Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS - TILE
A.
American Olean, Urban Tones (See Section 09000 for color selections and size)
B.
Substitutions: See Section 01600 for provisions.
2.02 A. 2.03 A. 2.04
ADHESIVE MATERIALS Adhesive: use manufacturer’s suggested adhesive. MORTAR MATERIALS Mortar Materials: ANSI/TCA A118.1; Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water. GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Grout: Cementitious type resistant to shrinking.
B.
Grout Epoxy Grout in shower floors and curbs.
C.
Grout Colors: To be approved by Architect.
2.05
MORTAR MIX AND GROUT MIX
A.
Mix and proportion pre-mix in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. TCA handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
B.
Excess Material: Leave Owner with 2% (of total needed for job) of excess material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
B.
Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean.
C.
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
SECTION 09300 PAGE 2
flatness tolerances. D. 3.03
Apply sealer to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. INSTALLATION - THIN SET METHOD
A.
Install adhesive, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Lay tile pattern indicated on Drawings (if applicable). Do not interrupt tile pattern around openings.
C.
Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align wall, base, and floor joints.
D.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout.
E.
Form internal angles coved and external angles bullnosed.
F.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
G.
Keep expansion/control joints free of mortar or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
H.
Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
I.
Grout tile joints.
J.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04
CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B.
Clean tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09300 PAGE 3
SECTION 09650 RUBBER BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SCOPE: Provide all rubber base and accessories, complete. See Finish Schedule for locations and extent of floor covering and accessories.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with requirements of Section 01300.
B.
Manufacturer=s Data: Submit copy of manufacturer=s technical data, installation instructions and maintenance instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. Transmit a copy of each installation instruction to Installer.
C.
Samples: Submit full color range samples for each type and pattern of resilient flooring and accessory specified for Architect=s selection.
1.03
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Delivery: Deliver materials to the project site in the manufacturer=s original unopened containers, clearly marked to indicate pattern gage, lot number and sequence of manufacturer.
B.
Storage: Store in original container at not less than 70 deg. F for at least 48 hours before start of installation.
1.04
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain minimum temperature of 70 deg. F. for minimum of 48 hours prior to installation. Maintain 70 deg. F. temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by the flooring manufacturer, but in any case not less than 48 hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
RUBBER BASE
A.
Rubber Base: Johnsonite 4" high topset cove, with preformed or molded interior and exterior corners, in colors as selected by the Architect. (See Section 09000)
B.
Resilient Edge Strips: Johnsonite 1/8" thick, rubber, bullnose edge, in color to match flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors; not less than 1" wide.
2.03
OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Provide adhesives, primers, seam sealers, crack fillers and other materials required but not specifically described, as recommended by the resilient flooring and accessories. Non-asbestos containing materials only.
SECTION 09650 PAGE 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
General 1.
Resilient Base: Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is indicated. Install base in as long as lengths as practicable. Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
2.
Resilient Edge Strip and Flooring: Place edge strips tightly butted and secured to flooring with adhesive. Install edge strips at all unprotected edges of flooring unless otherwise shown.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09650 PAGE 2
SECTION 09900 PAINTING (MUSKOGEE SCHOOLS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03
SECTION INCLUDES Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings. DEFINITIONS Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 12" x 12" in size illustrating selected colors, finish, and texture for each color selected. Submit samples on gyp board.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Deliver products to site sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
C.
Container label to include the manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation and instructions for mixing and reducing.
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Provide 1 gallon of each color, type and surface texture to owner.
C.
Label each container with color, type, texture and room locations, in addition to manufacturer's label
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers catalog names and numbers are used to aid in establishing kinds and quality of material required and are not used as an indication of color desired
B.
Manufacturers: Sherwin Williams
C.
NO Substitutions
SECTION 09900 PAGE 1
2.02 A.
2.03 A.
MATERIALS General: Provide paint, varnish, stain, lacquer and filler types as scheduled. If scheduled generically, provide best quality for various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint material manufactures, Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best grade product will not be acceptable. FINISHES Refer to schedules for surface finish and color schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.
3.02
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Aluminum Remove all oil, grease, dirt, oxide and other foreign material by cleaning per SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning.
B.
Block (Cinder and Concrete) Remove all loose mortar and foreign material. Surface must be free of laitance, concrete dust, dirt, form release agents, moisture curing membranes, loose cement, and hardeners. Concrete and mortar must be cured at least 30 days at 75°F.The pH of the surface should be between 6 and 9,unless the products to be used are designed to be used in high pH environments such as Loxon. On tilt-up and poured-in-place concrete, commercial detergents and abrasive blasting may be necessary to prepare the surface. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids with a patching compound such as ConSeal.
C.
Drywall (Interior and Exterior) Must be clean and dry. All nail heads must be set and spackled. Joints must be taped and covered with a joint compound. Spackled nail heads and tape joints must be sanded smooth and all dust removed prior to painting. Exterior surfaces must be spackled with exterior grade compounds.
D.
Galvanized Metal Allow to weather a minimum of 6 months prior to coating. Clean per SSPC-SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner, then prime as required. When weathering is not possible or the surface has been treated with chromate's or silicates, first Solvent Clean per SSPC-SP1 and apply a test area, priming as required. Allow the coating to dry at least one week before testing. If adhesion is poor, Brush Blast per SSPC-SP7 is necessary to remove these treatments.
E.
Previously Coated Surfaces Maintenance painting will frequently not permit or require complete removal of all old coatings prior to repainting. However, all surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt, foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers must be removed to assure sound bonding to the tightly adhering old paint. Glossy surfaces of old paint films must be clean and dull before repainting. Thorough washing with an abrasive cleanser will clean and dull in one operation, or, wash thoroughly and dull by sanding. Spot prime any bare areas with an appropriate primer. Recognize that any surface preparation short of total removal of the old coating may compromise the
SECTION 09900 PAGE 2
service length of the system. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet. Allow to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359. If the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is required. F.
Hand Tool Cleaning Hand Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Mill scale, rust, and paint are considered adherent if they cannot be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPCSP1. For complete instructions, refer to Steel Structures Paint Council Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 (SSPC-SP2)
G.
Wood (Interior) All finishing lumber and flooring must be stored in dry, warm rooms to prevent absorption of moisture, shrinkage, and roughening of the wood. All surfaces must be sanded smooth, with the grain, never across it. Surface blemishes must be corrected and the area cleaned of dust before coating.
3.03
APPLICATION
A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C.
Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D.
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
E.
Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F.
Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat.
G.
Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
H.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.
I.
Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
J.
Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
3.04
CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B.
Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard. Place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
3.05 A.
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES Steel-Unprimed 1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic Primer 2. Finish: B54W00151 - Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel
SECTION 09900 PAGE 3
B.
Steel- Shop Primed 1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic Primer 2. `Finish: B54W00151 - Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel
C.
Galvanized 1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic Primer 2. Finish: B54W00151 - Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel
D.
Aluminum- Mill Finish 1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic 2. Finish: B54W00151 - Pro Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel
E.
Masonry- Brick and CMU 1. Finish: A31T00040 - Loxon® Vertical Water Repellants 40% Silane 40% Silane
3.06
SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A.
Drywall 1. Primer: B28W02600 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer 2. Finish: B20W02651 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel
B.
HM Frames and Doors 1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic Primer 2. Finish: B34W02251 - ProMar® 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
C.
Masonry- CMU 1. Primer: B25W00025 - PrepRite® Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler White 2. Finish: B31W02651 - ProMar® 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss
D.
Steel-Unprimed 1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic Primer 2. Finish: B34W02251 - ProMar® 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
E.
Steel- Shop Primed 1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Acrylic Primer 2. Finish: B34W02251 - ProMar® 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
F.
Wood- Painted 1. Primer: B79W08810 - ProBlock® Interior Oil-Based Primer White 2. Finish: B34W02251 - ProMar® 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
G.
Wood- Stained 1. First Coat: A49V00200 - Wood Classics® Interior Oil Stain 2. Second Coat: B26V00043 - Wood Classics® FastDry Sanding Sealer Clear 3. Third Coat: A66F00390 - Wood Classics® FastDry Varnish Clear END OF SECTION
SECTION 09900 PAGE 4
SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
SECTION INCLUDES Access Floor System including interchangeable panels, understructure and all other accessories. RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 – Concrete Floors
B.
Section 08700 – Hardware
1.03 A,
1.04 A. B. C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Allowable tolerances: 1. Nominal panel size +or - .015” or less. 2. Panel Flatness .015”. 3. Panel Squareness within .015”. 4. Panel interchange ability- all panels, except those altered to meet special conditions, shall be interchangeable. SUBMITTALS Submit under provision of Section 01300. Manufacturer shall submit a sample of the floor panel and each understructure component. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings indicating floor panel layout including ramp, step, and railing location. 2. Details of assembly components, edge details and anchoring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A.
ACCESS FLOOR MANUFACTURERS Acceptable manufacturers: Provided their products meet or exceed requirements of the specification. 1.
B.
Pro Access Floors (858)566-9000,
[email protected] 2360 Corporate Circle, Suite 400; Henderson, NV 89074
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
SECTION 10270 PAGE 1
2.02
ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM
A.
Pro Access Floors, 1250 Concrete Steel raised Access Floor System: 1/16” gray Starlite HPL Color with Intregral Trim, New one year warranty, Ultimate load: 3800 lbs minimum at weakest point. NOTE: Insure Complete System
B.
Complete with under-structure consisting of the following items: 1. PAF 24” x 24” Concrete Steel Raised Access Floor Panels 2. 2- High Output Airflow panels to be located in field 3. Pedestal Assemblies- Base and Head for 6 inch FFH 4. Pre-drilled 4’ Stringers 5. Stringer Fasteners 6. Double Suction Floor Lifter 7. Industrial Pedestal Adhesive Glue 8. Ramp Kit: 4 foot wide and 6 foot long with panels, understructure, top and bottom angle connectors, rubber mats, fascia.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 A.
INSTALLATION Install system in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instruction
3.02
CLEANING
A.
Remove dirt and excess sealants, adhesives or compounds from exposed floor surfaces. All damaged or permanently soiled material shall be replaced.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10270 PAGE 2
SECTION 10426 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02
SECTION INCLUDES Interior non-illuminated surface mounted signage SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall coordination requirements.
C.
Submit shop drawings listing sign styles, lettering and locations, and overall dimensions of each engraved sign.
D.
Submit full size sample sign, Graphics Lettering, of type, style and color specified including method of attachment.
E.
Include installation template and hardware.
1.03 A. 1.04
MAINTENANCE DATA Submit under provisions of Section 01700. DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Package signs labeled in name groups.
1.05 A.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70 degrees F. Maintain this minimum during and after installation of signs.
SECTION 10426 PAGE 1
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Interior Signage: Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc. (518) 842-5303 Fax (518) 842-5306
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 A.
MATERIALS (INTERIOR SIGNAGE) Provide the following assemblies; locate where indicated in Schedule: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.03
Interior sign system: Sign material shall be ADA compliant non-glare modified acrylic with integral color. Substrate: 1/8" thick (7/8" thick for window signs Tactile characters shall rise 1/32" from sign face Letter form shall be Helvetica Medium Uppercase unless otherwise noted. Text and room numbers shall be 5/8" high Text shall be accompanied with grade 2 braille meeting ADA. Pictograms and symbols shall be 4 ½" high. Corners shall be ½" radius.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate units to configurations indicated on approved shop drawings.
B.
Verify all copy with Architect before fabrication.
C.
If copy is too long for one line, use multiple lines, keeping letter size specified, DO NOT hyphenate any words. Consult Architect for copy size if problems are encountered.
D.
Provide copy on inserts and headers as required on approved shop drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Examine areas to receive signage.
C.
Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate and project conditions.
D.
Install signage on latch side of door, outside of door indicated, 5'-0" o.c. above finish floor to center of sign unless otherwise directed by Architect.
E.
All font files can be supplied by Architect if needed.
3.02 A.
CLEANING Clean all exposed surfaces just prior to Substantial Completion in accordance with manufacturer’s written cleaning instructions. SECTION 10426 PAGE 2
3.03 A.
SCHEDULE Interior Signage: Dark Green
Graphics: White
Model # Mohawk 2000 Arch System M2000 Restroom Sign 8” x 8”
DESCRIPTION Men Women
QUANTITY One (1) One (1)
Mohawk 2000 Arch System M2000 Room Name 8” x 8”
Office Conference Servers
One (1) One (1) One (1)
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10426 PAGE 3
SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fire Extinguishers.
B.
Brackets & Accessories.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and shims.
B.
Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.
1.04
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05 A. 1.06 A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable code ANSI/NFPA 10 for requirements for extinguishers. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company
B.
J.L. Industries
C.
Muckle Manufacturing
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
SECTION 10522 PAGE 1
2.02
A.
EXTINGUISHERS (Note: On the plans, “FE” designates wall mounted fire extinguishers with brackets (2 units) Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Cast steel tank with pressure gauge: Class A, B, C, Size 10. UL 4A-60BC.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A.
INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10522 PAGE 2
SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Toilet and washroom accessories.
B.
Attachment hardware.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking: In wall framing and plates for support of accessories.
B.
Section 08800 - Glazing: Wall Mirrors.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ADA - American with Disabilities Act.
B.
ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.05 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bradley Corporation
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. 2. 3.
C.
American Dispenser Company Bobrick Washroom Equipment San Ja Mar Company
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
SECTION 10800 PAGE 1
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel
B.
Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
C.
Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, and security type.
D.
Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
2.03
FABRICATION
A.
Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
B.
Provide steel anchor plates, adapters and anchor components for installation.
2.04
KEYING
A.
Supply four (4) keys for each accessory to Owner.
B.
Master key all accessories.
2.05 A.
FINISHES Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawing, instructed by the manufacturer.
B.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ANSI A117.1 and ADA.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
SECTION 10800 PAGE 2
3.04
SCHEDULE (Provide all items listed below. Coordinate with plans for exact locations. If locations can’t be found, contact Architect).
A. B. C.
ITEM
MODEL #
COMMENTS
Grab Bars Mop Hook & Shelf Mirrors
Bradley 800 Series Bradley 9955 Bradley Model 700
Satin Chrome (2pairs) Provide I unit. Angle Framed (2 units)
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10800 PAGE 3
SECTION 13121WR PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING WALL & ROOF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Insulated metal wall panels including soffits.
C.
Insulated Standing Seam Roof System.
D.
Interior Metal Liner panels
E.
Gutter & Down Spout System
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03100-03300: Concrete footings, grade beams and floor slab.
B.
Section 08100: Metal doors and frames.
C.
Section 04200: Unit Masonry
D.
Section 09900 - Painting: Finish painting of exterior primed steel surfaces and inside surface of liner sheet.
E.
Section 15000 - Mechanical: Mechanical rough-in utilities.
F.
Section 16000 - Electrical: Electrical rough-in utilities.
1.03 A.
1.04
REFERENCES MBMA - 01 - (1986) Metal Building Manufacturers Association Low Rise Building Systems Manual. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Member to withstand dead load, applicable snow load and design loads due to pressure and suction of wind calculated in accordance with applicable code.
B.
Exterior wall and roof system to withstand imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of span: 1/90. Roof deck uplift: UL Class 90.
C.
Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within wall or roof system.
D.
Assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 120 degrees F.
E.
Size and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
SECTION 13121 PAGE 1
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Indicate wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage, bracing & strapping and method of installation.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on profiles, component dimensions and fasteners.
D.
Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate preparation requirements and assembly sequence.
1.06
WARRANTY
A.
Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Warranty: Manufacturers Standard 20 year warranty to include coverage for exterior pre-finished surfaces to cover pre-finished color coat against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, pooling, chalking or fading. Color Retention as set forth in ASTM D2244; Chalking as set forth in ASTM D659.
C.
Provide twenty year manufacturer's warranty for aluminized steel roof finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01
MATERIALS - WALL SYSTEM
A.
Sheet Steel Stock: ASTM A446 Grade A, galvanized to ASTM A525 G90 designation.
B.
Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type.
C.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, galvanized to ASTM A386 1.25 oz/sq ft, finish to match adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic type.
F.
Sealant: Manufacturer's standard type as specified in Section 07900, non-staining, elastomeric, skinning.
G.
Vinyl backed Insulation: 3" white vinyl backed reinforced batt rolled insulation.
H.
Color: Match existing
2.02
MANUFACTURER - STANDING SEAM ROOF SYSTEM
A.
Approved Manufacturers: 1. AEP-Span 2. MBCI 3. BRB Inc., Fort Gibson, OK 4. Alliance Steel, OKC 5. STAR , OKC
B.
Other Acceptable MBMA manufacturers offering equivalent systems. SECTION 13121 PAGE 2
C. 2.03
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. MATERIALS - STANDING SEAM ROOF SYSTEM
A.
Standing Seam Roof Panel, Flashing and end cap: 24 gauge Grade C or D with 50,000 psi min. yield strength, Galvalume panel with Kynar finish, 16”, 18" or 24" width, continuous length from eave to cap. All panels joined at the seams with mechanical seaming device. Color: match existing
B.
Rake and Eave Trim: 26 gauge, Grade D with 50,000 psi min. yield strength. Color: match existing
C.
Pipe Flashing: EPDM boot style flashing with aluminum base.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic type.
E.
Sealant: Manufacturer's standard type as specified in Section 07900, non-staining, elastomeric, skinning.
F.
Snow and Ice Clips: Provide manufacturer=s recommended snow clips ahead of gutters. Clear plastic and glued on clips are not allowed. All snow and ice clips must match roof color.
G.
Vinyl backed Insulation: 3" white vinyl backed batt rolled insulation.
2.04
MATERIALS - GUTTER AND DOWN SPOUTS
A.
Pre-coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G90 zinc coating; 22 gauge, 6" x 6" minimum gutter & down spout. Color: Gutter: White. Down spout: white.
B.
Components: 1. Gutters and Down spouts to match SMACNA rectangular profile with brackets and straps 2. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type; 3,000 psi. 3. Down spout boots 4. Gutter Screens: Mill finished .032 gauge aluminum screens, riveted or screwed to front lip of gutter, back edge fits under roof panels.
2.05
FABRICATION - WALL SYSTEMS
A.
Soffit Panels: Minimum 26 gauge metal thickness profile, lapped, male/female edges. Color is important to this product acceptance. (where shown)
B.
Internal and External Corners: Same material thickness and finish as adjacent material, profile brake formed shop cut and factory mitered to required angles.
C.
Flashings, Closure Pieces, Fascia, In fills, and Caps: Same material and finish as adjacent material, profile to suit system.
D.
Liner Panel: A. Field 24”liner panel: MBCI, ILM liner panel. Color: MPI Snow White.
E.
Fasteners: To maintain load requirements and weather tight installation, same finish as cladding, non-corrosive finish. SECTION 13121 PAGE 3
2.06
FABRICATION - ROOF SYSTEM
A.
Roofing: Minimum 24 gauge metal thickness, profile, lapped male/female edges and fitted with continuous gaskets.
B.
Flashings, Closure Pieces, Fascia, In fills, and Caps: Same material and finish as adjacent material, profile to suit system.
2.07
FABRICATION - GUTTERS AND DOWN SPOUTS
A.
Form gutters and downspouts of profiles to meet SMACNA requirements.
B.
Fabricate with connecting pieces, form section square , true and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of distortion. Allow for expansion at joints.
C.
Hem exposed edges of metal. Seal watertight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A.
3.02
EXAMINATION Verify that foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct position. ERECTION - WALL AND ROOFING SYSTEMS
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Exercise care when cutting pre-finished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface.
C.
Fasten cladding system to structural support, aligned level and plumb.
D.
Locate end laps over supports. End laps minimum 2 inches. Place sidelaps over bearing.
E.
Provide expansion joints where indicated.
F.
Use exposed fasteners.
G.
Install insulation and vinyl vapor barrier.
H.
Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration.
I.
System: Free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement and wind whistles.
J.
Insure that ridge cap and rake cap design prevents blow back from blowing moisture. Caps should warranty against migrating moisture.
3.03 A.
ERECTION - GUTTER AND DOWN SPOUT Rigidly support and secure components. Joint lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to down spouts.
SECTION 13121 PAGE 4
3.04
INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Seal wall and roof accessories watertight and weather tight with sealant in accordance with Section 07900.
C.
Contractor shall NOT affix manufacturer=s signs, decals or other advertisements on any portion of the structure.
3.05
TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level: 1/8 inch from plumb.
B.
Siding and Roofing: 1/8 inch from true position.
C.
Slope gutters: 1/4" per foot minimum.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 13121 PAGE 5
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 15050 - BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
DESCRIPTION A.
Basic methods and requirements for Division 15, MECHANICAL, applies to all sections of Division 15.
B.
Definitions: 1. Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms. 2. Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method.
RELATED WORK A.
Excavation and Backfill: Division 02, EARTHWORK.
B.
Concrete and Grout: Division 03, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
C.
Division 05, METAL FABRICATIONS.
D.
Division 07, FIRE STOPPING.
E.
Flashing for Wall and Roof Penetrations: Division 07, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
F.
Division 07, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.
G.
Division 09, PAINTING.
H.
Division 16, ELECTRICAL.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section
B.
Products Criteria: 1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. See other specification sections for any exceptions. 2. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization which maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the site. 3. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
4. 5.
6.
1.5
Server Safe Room
2014
or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
C.
Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements: 1. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications". 2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping". 3. Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.
D.
Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Owner prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
E.
Exposed Duct Work: The contractor shall use the highest standard of care when fabricating and installing all duct work that is to be exposed or is visible to the public.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit in accordance with DIVISION O1, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS.
B.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1. Submit belt drive with the driven equipment. Submit selection data for specific drives when requested by the Owner. 2. Submit electric motor data and variable speed drive data with the driven equipment. 3. Equipment and materials identification. 4. Fire-stopping materials. 5. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 6. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.
C.
Coordination Drawings: In accordance with DIVISION 01, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Provide detailed layout drawings of all piping and duct systems. Coordinate completely with the Architectural documents as well as ALL other subcontractors. In addition provide details of the following. 1. Mechanical equipment rooms. 2. Interstitial space. 3. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. 4. Pipe sleeves.
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools 5.
1.6
Server Safe Room
2014
Duct or equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets. 2. Provide all required documentation a minimum of 15 days prior to final acceptance of the project. 3. Provide according to the requirements herein and in DIVISION 01, Section: Operations and Maintenance Data.
E.
Provide copies of approved HVAC equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Subcontractor.
F.
Electrical Coordination: Prior to assembling submittal information the mechanical contractor shall ensure that the voltage on the mechanical submittals matches the electrical documents. Immediately report any discrepancy to the Architect and Engineer.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B.
Standard Building Code, including Mechanical and Plumbing Codes
C.
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): 430-89 Central Station Air-Handling Units
D.
American National Standard Institute (ANSI): B31.1-95 Power Piping
E.
Rubber Manufacturers Association (ANSI/RMA): IP-20-88 Drives Using Classical V-Belts and Sheaves - Cross Sections A, B, C, D, and E IP-21-91 Drives Using Double-V (Hexagonal) Belts (AA, BB, XX, DD Cross Sections) IP-22-91 Drives Using Narrow Multiple V-Belts (3V, 5V, and 8V Cross Sections)
F.
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 410-91 Recommended Safety Practices for Air Moving Devices
G.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC): SEC IX-95 Qualifications Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators
H.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A36/A36M-94 Carbon Structural Steel A575-89 Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 3
Muskogee Public Schools E84-95 E119-95
1.7
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc: SP-58-93 Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture SP-69-91 Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application
J.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-96 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 101-94 Life Safety Code
USE OF INSTALLED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION The mechanical equipment shall not be used to provide for heating or cooling during construction unless specific warrantee extensions are obtained from the manufacturer. Written proof of warrantee extensions will be required at the time of installation.
MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATION A.
1.9
2014
I.
A.
1.8
Server Safe Room
The manufacturer shall have a factory certified technician located within 100 miles of the job site. In addition, the manufacturer shall have a toll free 24-hour hotline with a maximum response time of 4 hours, 24 hours a day and 365 days a year. In addition, the manufacturer shall be represented by an authorized factory representative, whose office is located in the State of Oklahoma, and all equipment shall be purchased through local distribution and representation, in the State of Oklahoma, for Owner’s long term warranties and maintenance.
INTENT A.
By submitting a bid the Contractor acknowledges that he has thoroughly review all relevant drawings including mechanical, electrical, architectural, structural, civil and specialty drawings and completely understands the Owner’s intent. The Contractor shall provide a complete and working system, complying with all applicable codes. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, parts, tools, labor and other items as needed for a complete and working system even though those items may not be explicitly indicated in these documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
BELT DRIVES A.
Type: ANSI/RMA standard V-belts with proper motor pulley and driven sheave. Belts shall be constructed of reinforced cord and rubber.
B.
Dimensions, rating and selection standards: ANSI/RMA IP-20 and IP-21.
C.
Minimum Horsepower Rating: Motor horsepower plus recommended ANSI/RMA service factor (not less than 20 percent) in addition to the ANSI/RMA allowances for pitch diameter, center distance, and arc of contact.
D.
Maximum Speed: 25.5 M/S (5000 feet per minute).
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 4
Muskogee Public Schools
2014
E.
Adjustment Provisions: For alignment and ANSI/RMA standard allowances for installation and take-up.
F.
Drives may utilize a single V-Belt (any cross section) when it is the manufacturer's standard.
G.
Multiple Belts: Matched to ANSI/RMA specified limits by measurement on a belt measuring fixture. Seal matched sets together to prevent mixing or partial loss of sets. Replacement, when necessary, shall be an entire set of new matched belts.
H.
Sheaves and Pulleys: 1. Material: Pressed steel, or close grained cast iron. 2. Bore: Fixed or bushing type for securing to shaft with keys. 3. Balanced: Statically and dynamically. 4. Groove spacing for driving and driven pulleys shall be the same. 5. Minimum Diameter of V-Belt Sheaves (ANSI/RMA recommendations) in millimeters and inches: Fractional Horsepower Cross Min. od Section 2L 20 (0.8) 3L 38 (1.5) 4L 64 (2.5) 5L 89 (3.5)
I.
2.2
Server Safe Room
Standard Cross Min. od Section A 83 (3.25) B 146 (5.75) C 239 (9.40) D 345 (13.60) E 554 (21.80)
High Capacity Cross Min. od Section 3V 67 (2.65) 4V 180 (7.10) 5V 318 (12.50)
Drive Types, Based on ARI 435: 1. Provide adjustable-pitch or fixed-pitch drive as follows: a. Fan speeds up to 1800 RPM: 7.5 kw (10 horsepower) and smaller. b. Fan speeds over 1800 RPM: 2.2 kw (3 horsepower) and smaller. 2. Provide fixed-pitch drives for drives larger than those listed above. 3. The final fan speeds required to just meet the system CFM and pressure requirements, without throttling, shall be determined by adjustment of a temporary adjustable-pitch motor sheave or by fan law calculation if a fixed-pitch drive is used initially.
DRIVE GUARDS A.
For machinery and equipment, provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts, chains, couplings, pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless of height above the floor. Drive guards may be excluded where motors and drives are inside factory fabricated air handling unit casings.
B.
Materials: Sheet steel, cast iron, expanded metal or wire mesh rigidly secured so as to be removable without disassembling pipe, duct, or electrical connections to equipment.
C.
Access for Speed Measurement: one inch diameter hole at each shaft center.
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 5
Muskogee Public Schools 2.3
2.4
Server Safe Room
2014
ELECTRIC MOTORS A.
Provide special energy efficient motors where scheduled. Unless otherwise specified for a particular application use electric motors with the following requirements.
B.
Single-phase Motors: Capacitor-start type for hard starting applications. Motors for centrifugal fans and pumps may be split phase or permanent split capacitor (PSC). Each two speed motor shall have two separate windings. Provide a time delay (20 seconds minimum) relay for switching from high to low speed.
C.
Polyphase Motors: NEMA Design B, Squirrel cage, induction type. Each two speed motor shall have two separate windings. Provide a time delay (20 seconds minimum) relay for switching from high to low speed.
D.
Rating: Continuous duty at 100 percent capacity in an ambient temperature of 40 EC (104 EF); minimum horsepower as shown on drawings; maximum horsepower in normal operation not to exceed nameplate rating without service factor.
E.
Insulation Resistance: Not less than one-half megohm between stator conductors and frame, to be determined at the time of final inspection.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION A.
Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings and shown in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in DIVISION 09, PAINTING.
B.
Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) high of brass with black-filled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters specified in DIVISION 09, PAINTING permanently fastened to the equipment. Identify unit components such as coils, filters, fans, etc.
C.
Exterior (Outdoor) Equipment: Brass nameplates, with engraved black filled letters, not less than 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) high riveted or bolted to the equipment.
D.
Control Items: Label all temperature and humidity sensors, controllers and control dampers. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams.
E.
Valve Tags and Lists: 1. Plumbing: Provide for all valves (Fixture stops not included). 2. HVAC: Provide for all valves. 3. Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (½ inch) high for number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4 inch) for service designation on 19 gage 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain. 4. Valve lists: Typed or printed plastic coated card(s), sized 216 mm(8-1/2 inches) by 280 mm (11 inches) showing tag number, valve function and area of control, for each service or system. Punch sheets for a 3-ring notebook. 5. Provide detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each valve. Identify location of each valve with a color coded thumb tack
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 6
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
in ceiling. F.
2.5
Pipe Identification: 1. Provide pipe identification include fluid type: Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, Hydronic Water (chilled, hot, loop), fire protection, Compressed Air, Natural Gas, Refrigerant Piping, Specialty Gas Piping 2. Pipe identification and markers shall be equal to those manufactured by Seton company. Colors shall match ANSI requirements.
FIRE STOPPING DIVISION 07, FIRE STOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases where penetrations occur for piping and ductwork. Refer to DIVISION 15, HVAC, for fire stop pipe and duct insulation, if required.
2.6
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS A.
Vibration Isolators: Refer to DIVISION 15, HVAC.
B.
In lieu of the paragraph which follow, suspended equipment support and restraints may be designed and installed in accordance with the National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG), most current edition. Submittals based on either the NUSIG guidelines or the following paragraphs of this Section shall be stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in a state where the project is located. Support of suspended equipment over 227 kg (500 pounds) shall be submitted for approval of the Owner in all cases. See paragraph 2.8.L for lateral force design requirements.
C.
Seismic Restraint of Piping: 1. Design criteria is as follows: a. Piping resiliently supported: 120 percent of the weight of the systems and components and contents. b. Piping not resiliently supported: 60 percent of the weight of the system components and contents. c. Except as noted above, meet the more severe requirements of the Local Code and the latest International Building Code for determining seismic force Fp. 2. Provide one of the following options: a. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet requirements of the latest Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the prescribed Seismic Hazard Level (SHL) A. b. Design and installation to meet the criteria listed above, and meet the most current requirements of the National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG). Contractor shall submit all design tables and information for the design force levels, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the State where project is located. c. Where SMACNA or NUSIG requirements are not met completely, submit proposed alternate details and calculations to completely address seismic bracing requirements. Such designs shall use more severe of the Local Code and the Uniform Building Code requirements for determining seismic forces, and be performed, stamped and signed by a professional engineer registered in the
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 7
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
State where project is located. Revise if necessary any details shown on the contract drawings for vertical support and lateral bracing, and submit for the approval of the Owner to meet the design criteria listed above. 2.7
2.8
PIPE PENETRATIONS A.
Install sleeves during construction for other than blocked out floor openings for risers in mechanical bays.
B.
To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following: 1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (one inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for watertight joint. 2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive around opening. 3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around penetration.
C.
Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam flanges. Any deviation from this requirements must receive prior approval of Owner.
D.
Sheet Metal, Plastic, or Moisture-resistant Fiber Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for below.
E.
Cast Iron or Zinc Coated Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through exterior walls below grade. Make space between sleeve and pipe watertight with a modular or link rubber seal. Seal shall be applied at both ends of sleeve.
F.
Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. Provide sleeve for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms, laundry work rooms, and animal rooms above basement. Except in mechanical rooms, connect sleeve with floor plate.
G.
Brass Pipe Sleeves: Provide for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile floors. Connect sleeve with floor plate.
H.
Sleeves are not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall construction.
I.
Sleeve Clearance: Sleeve through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be 25 mm (one inch) greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation. Interior openings shall be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.
J.
Sealant and Adhesives: CAULKING.
Shall be as specified in DIVISION 07, SEALANTS AND
TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS A.
Furnish, and turn over to the Owner, special tools not readily available commercially, that are
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 8
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
required for disassembly or adjustment of equipment and machinery furnished.
2.9
B.
Grease Guns with Attachments for Applicable Fittings: One for each type of grease required for each motor or other equipment.
C.
Tool Containers: Hardwood or metal, permanently identified for in tended service and mounted, or located, where directed by the Owner.
D.
Lubricants: A minimum of 0.95 L (one quart) of oil, and 0.45 kg (one pound) of grease, of equipment manufacturer's recommended grade and type, in unopened containers and properly identified as to use for each different application.
WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A.
Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection.
B.
Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.64 mm (0.025 inch) for up to 80 mm (3 inch) pipe, 0.89 mm (0.035 inch) for larger pipe.
C.
Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished areas only. Use also where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop from overhead. Provide a watertight joint in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves are specified.
D.
Coordinate locations with architectural finish drawings, note exposed plates on coordination drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment. Locate piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork and equipment clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. Follow manufacturer's published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified.
B.
Protection and Cleaning: 1. Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Owner. Damaged or defective items in the opinion of the Owner, shall be replaced. 2. Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible, from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect fixtures and equipment against dirt, water chemical, or mechanical injury. At completion of all work thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment.
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 9
Muskogee Public Schools
3.2
Server Safe Room
2014
C.
Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 3000 psi minimum, specified in DIVISION 03, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
D.
Install gages, thermometers, valves and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Locate and position thermometers and gages to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work.
E.
Switchgear Drip Protection: Every effort shall be made to eliminate the installation of pipe above electrical and telephone switchgear. If this is not possible, encase pipe in a second pipe with a minimum of joints.
F.
Inaccessible Equipment: 1. Where the Owners Representative, Architect or Engineer determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled or remedial action performed as directed at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. The term "conveniently accessible" is defined as capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, fans, pumps, belt guards, transformers, high voltage lines, piping, and ductwork.
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.
Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or burn holes in structural steel only with the prior approval of the Owner.
B.
Use of chain, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing; or, hangers suspended from piping above will not be permitted. Replace or thoroughly clean rusty products and paint with zinc primer.
C.
Use hanger rods that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 15 mm (½ inch) clearance between pipe or piping covering and adjacent work.
D.
HVAC Horizontal Pipe Support Spacing: Refer to MSS SP-69. Provide additional supports at valves, strainers, in-line pumps and other heavy components. Provide a support within 300 mm (one foot) of each elbow.
E.
HVAC Vertical Pipe Supports: 1. Up to 150 mm (6 inch) pipe, 9 m (30 feet) long, bolt riser clamps to the pipe below couplings, or welded to the pipe and rests supports securely on the building structure. 2. Vertical pipe larger than the foregoing, support on base elbows or tees, or substantial pipe legs extending to the building structure.
F.
Plumbing horizontal and vertical pipe supports, refer to the National Standard Plumbing Code or International Plumbing Code.
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 10
Muskogee Public Schools 3.3
3.4
A.
Belt Drive: Set driving and driven shafts parallel and align so that the corresponding grooves are in the same plane.
B.
Direct-connect Drive: Securely mount motor in accurate alignment so that shafts are free from both angular and parallel misalignment when both motor and driven machine are operating at normal temperatures.
LUBRICATION Field check and lubricate equipment requiring lubrication prior to initial operation.
STARTUP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION A.
3.6
2014
MOTOR AND DRIVE ALIGNMENT
A. 3.5
Server Safe Room
Start up equipment as described in equipment specifications. Verify that vibration is within specified tolerance prior to extended operation. Temporary use of equipment is specified in DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TEMPORARY USE OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS A.
Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified in DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS and submit the test reports and records to the Owner.
B.
Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests for heating systems and for cooling systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following completion of work. END OF SECTION
Basic Methods and Requirements (Mechanical)
15050 - 11
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING AND PIPING - GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
DESCRIPTION A.
Work included: Provide piping where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following systems: 1. Drain, waste, and vent systems; 2. Domestic water system; 3. Condensate piping system; 4. Natural Gas piping systems; 5. Plumbing fixtures. 6. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, labor and other items or services necessary to ensure that the Owner receives a complete and working system. Contractor shall provide all items and services required by Federal, State and Local codes.
B.
Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
C.
Definitions: 1. The words "Mechanical Contractor" and "Contractor" shall indicate the same person in Division 15 of this Specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Codes and regulations: 1. In addition to complying with the specific requirements, comply with pertinent and most recently issued regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Those agencies include, but are not limited to, the following: a. International Plumbing Code b. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Codes and Standards c. American Society of Testing and Materials Pipe, Pipe Thread and Construction Specifications d. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards e. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Duct Construction Standards f. International Building Code g. National Fire Protection Association Codes 13, 54 and 101 h. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. i. American Refrigeration Institute j. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute k. American National Standards Institute l. Public Water System Rules and Regulations published by the Oklahoma Department of Health 2. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the Engineer.
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 1
Muskogee Public Schools
1.4
1.5
2014
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit in accordance with DIVISION O1, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS.
B.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1. Equipment and materials identification. 2. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 3. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.
C.
Coordination Drawings: In accordance with DIVISION 01, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Provide detailed layout drawings of all piping and duct systems. Coordinate completely with the Architectural documents as well as ALL other subcontractors. In addition provide details of the following. 1. Mechanical equipment rooms. 2. Interstitial space. 3. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. 4. Pipe sleeves. 5. Pipe equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets. 2. Provide all required documentation a minimum of 15 days prior to final acceptance of the project. 3. Provide according to the requirements herein and in DIVISION 01, Section: Operations and Maintenance Data.
E.
Provide copies of approved Plumbing and Piping equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Subcontractor.
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
1.6
Server Safe Room
In general, all equipment, materials and fixtures shall be protected from theft, vandalism and harmful effects of weather.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.
The Drawings are a guide to the Contractor to show the general arrangement of equipment, piping and conduit. The Drawings have been carefully reviewed by the Engineer to avoid conflict between trades but due to the scale of the drawings conflicts between trades may arise. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the other trades and with the Architect to insure that this job is installed in a correct and timely manner. All conflicts are to be brought to the attention of the Architect immediately and resolved with minimum impact to the overall project. By submitting a bid the Contractor acknowledges that adequate information has been provided for the successful completion of the project. No change orders or additional payments will be considered for any results of space conflicts.
B.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials, equipment and labor to provide a complete and working system even though some material or equipment may not be shown on the Drawings.
C.
Great care has been given to locations of ducts, diffusers, and grilles. The mechanical and electrical contractors shall coordinate as required to insure that all spacing conflicts are resolved.
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 2
Muskogee Public Schools 1.7
2014
AS BUILT DRAWINGS A.
1.8
Server Safe Room
The Mechanical Contractor shall, as work progresses, prepare a set of Drawings indicating actual location of all piping, equipment, hangers, fixtures and cleanouts. The Drawings shall include actual dimensions as required to accurately depict all locations. The drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of DIVISION O1 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A.
The Mechanical Contractor shall arrange, coordinate and pay for all fees, permits and inspections required by Federal, State and Local authorities.
B.
The Mechanical Contractor shall notify in writing the Architect and Engineer 48 hours before each scheduled inspection.
C.
The Mechanical Contractor shall provide copies of all fees paid and permits to the Architect.
1.9 GUARANTEE A.
The entire mechanical portion of this project, including but not necessarily limited to, HVAC systems, piping and plumbing systems, mechanical equipment, plumbing fixtures, special mechanical equipment and all other items part of the mechanical contract as a whole shall be warranted against defects in equipment, fixtures, all other materials or labor for one full year (365 days) from the date of substantial completion by the Owner.
B.
Defects found in the equipment or materials during that time period shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE SCHEDULE A.
Drain, waste, vent system: 1. For sanitary or work below the slab: a. Provide Cast Iron Hub and Spigot pipe and drainage fittings. 2. Above slab: a. Sizes 4" and larger: Provide Cast Iron No-Hub pipe and drainage fittings. b. Waste and vent piping 3" and smaller installed above ground: Provide Cast Iron No-Hub pipe and drainage fittings. 3. Below grade (below grade, under slab or paved area): a. Provide Cast Iron Hub and Spigot pipe and drainage fittings. 4. Where allowed by local code Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings (Type DWV) may be substituted.
B.
Water system (domestic water piping): 1. Above slab, provide Type "L" copper with sweated connections meeting ASTM B88. 2. Below slab and below grade, provide Type "L" copper with sweated connections meeting ASTM B88.
C.
Natural Gas piping: 1. Above slab, provide Schedule 40 black steel pipe meeting ASTM specification A120 with malleable iron screw fittings, except where pipe or fittings are exposed to weather or other harmful environments. Protect exposed pipe with approved coatings, two applications. Coating color shall be ANSI standard for exposed natural gas piping. 2. Natural gas piping 2-1/2" and larger shall be either butt welded or socket welded. 3. Gas piping 2" and smaller shall be screwed. 4. Fittings 2" and larger shall be 300 lb. malleable iron. Fittings 1-1/2" and smaller shall be 150
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 3
Muskogee Public Schools
5. 6. 7.
2.2
Server Safe Room
2014
lb. malleable iron. Below slab, provide polyethylene rated for underground natural gas service and conforming to all provisions of ASTM D2104. All gas pipe work shall conform to NFPA 54. Gas pipe installed below slab shall be installed in a sleeve ventilated to the atmosphere.
D.
Condensate piping: 1. Provide Type L copper pipe with sweat joints; or, 2. Provide Schedule 40 PVC pipe with glue joints. 3. All sizes shall conform to those shown on the Drawings. 4. All pipe shall be rigidly supported as indicated in other sections of this Specifications. PVC pipe shall be supported on not less than 48" center and greater as required to completely eliminate pipe deflection.
E.
Roof Drain and Storm Water piping: 1. Where indicated provide Schedule 40 PVC pipe and fittings, glue joint, Type DWV, complying with ASTM D1785. 2. Use manufacturer specified or recommended cleaners, solvents and adhesives.
F.
All exposed piping shall be coated with oil base paint and the color scheme shall meet industry standards. Submit a color chart with the submittals.
MATERIALS A.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: 1. Provide Cast Iron No-Hub soil pipe and No-Hub fittings and connectors as manufactured by Tyler Pipe Company or approved equal. Cast iron soil pipe shall be service weight and coated on the interior and exterior of pipe with approved tar compound. Manufacturer, pipe size and pipe type shall be printed on each pipe joint. 2. Provide Cast Iron Hub and Spigot soil pipe and No-Hub fittings and connectors as manufactured by Tyler Pipe Company or approved equal. Cast iron soil pipe shall be service weight and coated on the interior and exterior of pipe with approved tar compound. Manufacturer, pipe size and pipe type shall be printed on each pipe joint.
B. Galvanized or black steel pipe: 1. Provide standard weight pipe complying with ASTM A120 or ASTM A53. 2. Fittings and connections 2" and below shall be screwed. 3. Fittings 2-1/2" and above shall be socket welded or butt welded. 4. All black steel pipe exposed to the weather shall be primed and painted with two coats of quality exterior, oil based paint. C.
Plastic Pipe : 1. Where indicated provide PVC pipe complying with ASTM D1785. 2. Use manufacturer specified or recommended cleaners, solvents and adhesives. 3. Where indicated, provide Polyethylene pipe complying with ASTM D2104. 4. Polyethylene pipe shall be connected with heat weld joints, solvent joints are not acceptable.
D.
Copper Pipe: 1. Provide type L copper water pipe conforming to ASTM B88.
E.
Fittings: 1. For all copper lines, provide compatible sweat copper fittings. 2. For black steel lines, provide black malleable iron fittings. 3. For PVC pipe provide glue type PVC fittings.
F.
Unions: 1. For all copper lines, provide compatible sweat copper unions.
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 4
Muskogee Public Schools 2. 2.3
2.4
2.5
Server Safe Room
2014
For connections in iron pipe lines 3" and smaller, provide ground joint brass-to-iron fittings (dielectric unions).
VALVES A.
Ball Valves: 1. Steel: Provide Conbraco Series 73-100 ball valves or equal. 2. Brass: Provide Conbraco Series 70-200 ball valves or equal.
B.
Gate Valves: 1. Steel: Provide Crane No. 488 gate valves or equal. 2. Brass: Provide Crane No. 1700S gate valves or equal.
C.
Globe Valves: 1. Steel: Provide Crane No. 254XR globe valves or equal. 2. Brass: Provide Crane No. 1 globe valves or equal.
D.
Check Valves: 1. Steel: Provide Crane No. 345-1/2 check valves or equal. 2. Brass: Provide Crane No. 76E or No.366E check valves or equal.
E.
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: 1. Provide Oklahoma Department of Health reduced pressure backflow preventer on the city water riser into the building. 2. Units shall be constructed in accordance with ASSE Standard 1013. 3. Valves shall be Watts Series 009 or Engineer approved equal. 4. Pipe relief to floor drain.
F.
Plastic pipe requiring valves shall have brass valves installed unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
PIPE INSULATION A.
Domestic hot and cold water piping and roof drain piping: 1. Piping above grade shall be insulated with 1" thick PPG fiberglass pipe insulation with factory applied Flame Retardant Vinyl, Vapor Barrier jacketed as manufactured by PPG Industries. a. Insulation shall have a maximum K factor of 0.24 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean temperature with a normal density of 4 pounds per cubic foot. b. Insulation shall be pre-molded, three foot minimum length long sectional and be split ready for application. c. Apply insulation over clean dry pipe with all joints butted firmly together. Butt joints shall be wrapped with a 3" wide strip of the vapor barrier jacket cemented with white vapor barrier cement (Benjamin Foster 82-07 or equivalent). d. Longitudinal laps shall be sealed with white vapor barrier cement (Benjamin Foster 82-07 or equivalent). 2. Piping below slab or in washdown areas shall be insulated with 3/4" Armaflex 22 insulation with all joints sealed with adhesive recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
B.
All pipe insulation shall be protected from hangers using 24 gauge galvanized steel plates curved to conform to the radius of the pipe insulation.
C.
All elbows, tees, valves and other fittings shall be insulated with a premolded, rigid PVC or other plastic outer cover, Zeston or equal.
PIPE HANGERS A.
Soil, waste, vent, condensate drain, roof drain and domestic water piping: 1. Provide adjustable, swivel type hanger with 1/4" allthread rod and beam clamp. Steel angle
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 5
Muskogee Public Schools
2.
3. 4. 2.6
2.7
2.9
2014
shall be secured across two roof purlins and used to support the weight of the pipe and hanger. The beam clamp shall be securely fastened to the steel angle. Steel angle shall be of sufficient size to safely carry the weight of the pipe with a substantial safety factor. Trapeze hangers may be used to carry groups of pipes. A trapeze hanger shall be constructed by supporting either end of a length of steel tube or steel angel or steel unistrut with an allthread rod and beam clamp. The rod shall be attached to the tube length with a washer and two lock nuts. Copper, cast iron and steel pipes larger than 2" shall be supported on 8' centers or less. Copper, cast iron and steel pipes 2" and smaller shall be supported on 5' centers or less. Plastic pipes 4" and larger shall be supported on 8' centers. Plastic pipes smaller than 4" shall be supported on 4' centers or as required to completely eliminate deflection.
SLEEVES A.
Where pipes pass through fire rated concrete, masonry or stud walls, or pass through ceilings, provide Proset System A fireproof sleeving system or Engineer approved equal with proper sized sleeves. All fire rated sleeves shall be U.L. listed.
B.
In all non-fire rated concrete, masonry or stud walls, provide a schedule 40 PVC sleeve two sizes great the pipe penetrating the wall. The void space between the outer pipe wall and inner wall of the sleeve shall be filled with cotton rope or other suitable packing material. Pipe shall be sealed in place with Architect approved urethane sealant. Chrome plated escutcheons shall be provided on either side of pipe sleeves where pipes are below ceilings or in other areas accessible to the public.
SOLDER FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A.
2.8
Server Safe Room
The Mechanical Contractor shall only use lead free solder on the domestic water copper piping on this project.
CLEANOUTS, FLOOR DRAINS AND ROOF DRAINS A.
Exterior: Wade W-6030 with cast iron vandal proof cover.
B.
Floor cleanout: Wade W-6030
C.
Wall cleanout: Wade W-8450-R
D.
Floor drain: Wade W-1102
E.
Roof drain: Wade 3000
F.
All interior cleanouts shall have a removable chrome plated steel plate covering the cleanout plug. Coordinate location of all plates with the Architectural finish drawings.
G.
Refer to installation details on the Drawings for further information.
PLUMBING FIXTURES A.
In general, plumbing fixtures shall conform to those on the plumbing fixture schedule.
B.
Vitreous china fixtures shall meet ANSI standards A112.19.2M.
C.
Stainless steel fixtures shall be fabricated from the 18 gauge stainless steel.
D.
All fixtures designated as Handicapped shall comply with all applicable provisions of the American with Disabilities Act and shall be mounted at the height recommended by ANSI for elderly and handicapped usage. Insulate all supply and drain pipes under handicapped designated lavatories
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 6
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
(use prefabricated insulation system with rigid plastic outer covers).
2.10
2.11
E.
Acceptable vitreous china fixture manufacturers shall be as follows: American Standard, Crane, Kohler and Eljer.
F.
Acceptable stainless steel fixture manufacturers shall be as follows: Just and Elkay
G.
All supplies, toilet seats, p-traps, carriers, valves and miscellaneous fittings shall be as specified unless written exceptions are issued by the Architect prior to the bid date.
TANKLESS ELECTRIC WATER HEATER A.
Tankless electric water heaters shall be equal to Chronomite Model SR15L. The capacity of this unit is 1 GPM with a 31F temperature rise. Temperature control shall be microprocessor based. Water outlet temperature shall be not greater than 110F.
B.
Tankless unit shall include a steel housing, electrical element assembly fabricated from Celcon plastic, electrical coils fabricated from nichrome. Provide flow control and compression fittings with each unit.
C.
Unit shall meet ADA and shall be UL listed.
OTHER MATERIALS A.
Provide other material, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and subject to approval of the Engineer.
B.
Provide all materials necessary to comply with the International Plumbing Codes as well as local codes and the ADA, even though all such items may not necessarily be explicitly indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXISTING CONDITIONS A.
3.2
3.3
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of installation indicates that the Contractor accepts the existing conditions.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B.
Coordination Drawings: In accordance with DIVISION 01, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Coordinate completely with the Architectural documents as well as ALL other subcontractors. In addition provide details of the following. 1. Mechanical equipment rooms. 2. Interstitial space. 3. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. 4. Pipe sleeves. 5. Duct or equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 7
Muskogee Public Schools
3.4
Server Safe Room
2014
A.
General: 1. Proceed as rapidly as the building construction will permit. 2. Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude dirt until fixtures are installed and final connections have been made. 3. Cut pipe accurately, and work into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing windows, doors, and other openings. Excessive cutting or other weakening of the building will not be permitted. 4. Show no tool marks or threads on exposed plated, polished, or enameled connections from fixtures. Tape all finished surfaces to prevent damage during construction. 5. Make changes in directions with fittings; make changes in main sizes with eccentric reducing fittings. Unless otherwise noted, install water supply and return piping with straight side of eccentric fittings at the top of the pipe. 6. Run horizontal sanitary and storm drainage piping at a uniform grade of 1/8" drop per foot of run unless otherwise noted. Run horizontal water piping with an adequate pitch upwards in the direction of the flow to allow complete drainage. 7. Provide sufficient swing joint, ball joints, expansion loops, and devices necessary for a flexible piping system, whether or not shown on the Drawings. 8. Support piping independently at pump, coils, tanks, and similar locations so that the weight of pipe will not be supported by the equipment. 9. Pipe the drains from pump glands, drip pans, relief valves, air vents, and similar locations, to spill over an open site drain, floor drain, or other acceptable discharge point, and terminate with a plain and unthreaded pipe 6" above the drain. Rigidly support all drain lines to walls or other structure. Indicate locations in the shop drawings. 10. Securely bolt all equipment, isolators, hangers, and similar items in place. 11. Support each item independently from other pipes. Do not use wire for hanging or strapping pipes. 12. Provide complete dielectric isolation between ferrous and non-ferrous metals. 13. Provide union and shutoff valves suitably located to facilitate maintenance and removal of equipment and apparatus. As a minimum isolation valves shall be located on each group branch. 14. All plumbing fixtures shall be individually valved. Valves shall be located in easily accessible and marked locations
B.
Equipment access: 1. Install piping, equipment, and accessories to permit access for maintenance. Relocate items as necessary to provide such access, and without additional cost to the owner. 2. Provide access doors where valves, motors, or equipment requiring access for maintenance are located in walls or chases or above ceilings. Coordinate location of access doors with other trades as required. Coordinate locations with architectural finishes and indicate locations on the coordination drawings.
PIPE JOINTS A.
Copper tubing: 1. Cut square, remove burrs, and clean inside of female filling to a bright finish. a. Apply solder flux with a brush to tubing. b. Remove internal parts of solder-end valves prior to soldering. 2. Provide dielectric unions at points of connection of copper tubing to ferrous piping and equipment.
B.
Screwed piping: 1. Deburr cuts. a. Do not ream exceeding internal diameter of pipe. b. Thread to requirements of ANSI B2.1. 2. Use teflon tape or approved pipe dope on male thread prior to joining other services.
C.
Glue piping: 1. Deburr cuts. Ream internal portion of pipe so that all plastic chips and burrs are removed and
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 8
Muskogee Public Schools
2. 3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Server Safe Room
2014
the interior surface of the pipe joint is smooth. Clean pipe with manufacturer approved cleaner before applying glue. Apply manufacturer approved adhesive as instructed by the manufacturer.
PIPE SUPPORTS A.
Arrange pipe supports to prevent excessive deflection, and to avoid excessive bending stresses.
B.
Galvanized sheet steel plates shall be used to protect pipe insulation.
SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A.
Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and ceilings. 1. Set pipe sleeves in place before concrete is poured. 2. For uninsulated pipe, provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through, or provide minimum of ½" clearance between inside and outside of the pipe. 3. For insulated pipe, provide sleeves of adequate size to accommodate the full thickness of pipe covering, with clearance for packing and caulking.
B.
Caulk the space between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering, using a noncombustible, permanently plastic, waterproof, non-staining compound which leaves a smooth finished appearance, or pack with noncombustible cotton, rope, or fiberglass to within ½" of both ends and provide the waterproof compound described above.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING A.
Provide personnel and equipment, and arrange to pay the costs of all required test and inspections required governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Provide copies of all test results to the Architect.
B.
Where tests show materials or workmanship to be deficient, replace or repair as necessary, and repeat the tests until the specified standards are achieved. Tests will be repeated at no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
Adjust the system to optimum standards of operation.
D.
At a minimum the domestic water and DWV system will be pressure tested in accordance with the Oklahoma Department of Health regulations and local utility company codes and regulations. The Engineer shall be present for all testing. The Architect and Engineer shall be notified in writing a minimum of 48 hours before each scheduled test.
STERILIZATION A.
Sterilize all water lines with a chlorine-water solution as directed by the Oklahoma Department of Health. Use approved sterilizing compounds and methods. END OF SECTION
Plumbing and Piping - General
15400 9
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 15600 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
DESCRIPTION A.
Work included: Provide HVAC equipment where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Supply and return ductwork system with grills, diffusers and registers, 2. Exhaust systems including, but not necessarily limited to toilets with fans, motors, ductwork, grills, registers, controls and related items, 3. Temperature and humidity control system, 4. Motors as required, 5. Acoustical and thermal insulation of ducts and equipment, 6. Gas fired package units, condensing units, and air handling units.
B.
Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
C.
Intent: 1. It is the Owner's intention to provide a complete HVAC system including equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall install control wire conduits, install thermostat, temperature sensor mounting boxes and pull control wire for thermostats but the Mechanical Contractor shall make final control connections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Codes and regulations: 1. In addition to complying with the specific requirements, comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Those agencies include, but are not limited to, the following: a. National Energy Code b. Oklahoma State (International) Mechanical Code (IMC) c. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) d. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) e. National Fire Protection Association including NFPA 13, 90a, 101 f. International Building Code (IBC)
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
2.
1.4
1.5
Server Safe Room
2014
g. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) h. Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) i. American Refrigeration Institute including 210, 240 and 270 (ARI) j. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit in accordance with DIVISION O1, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS.
B.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1. Submit belt drive with the driven equipment. Submit selection data for specific drives when requested by the Owner. 2. Submit electric motor data and variable speed drive data with the driven equipment. 3. Equipment and materials identification. 4. Fire-stopping materials. 5. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 6. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.
C.
Coordination Drawings: In accordance with DIVISION 01, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Coordinate completely with the Architectural documents as well as ALL other subcontractors. In addition provide details of the following. 1. Mechanical equipment rooms. 2. Interstitial space. 3. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. 4. Pipe sleeves. 5. Duct or equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets. 2. Provide all required documentation a minimum of 15 days prior to final acceptance of the project. 3. Provide according to the requirements herein and in DIVISION 01, Section: Operations and Maintenance Data.
E.
Provide copies of approved HVAC equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Subcontractor.
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
In general, equipment and materials shall be stored in a manner as to protect the materials from theft, vandalism and the harmful effects of the weather. Materials that are temperature sensitive
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
shall be stored in a tempered area. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of all materials and equipment stored at the jobsite. B.
1.6
The Contractor shall store (off site) all materials, fixtures and equipment required for this project. These materials shall be brought to the jobsite when required for installation.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.
The Drawings are schematic in nature. The Contractor shall not scale directly the Drawings, rather the Contractor will obtain dimensional information from written information on the Drawings and in the Specifications. By submitting a bid the Contractor acknowledged that he has adequate information to install a complete working system.
B.
Comply with all applicable provisions of DIVISION 15.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
DUCTWORK (GENERAL) A.
For exhaust systems and for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, provide galvanized sheet metal ducts fabricated and installed to pertinent ASHRAE and SMACNA standards, or to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, whichever requirement is more stringent.
B.
In all areas seal ALL duct seams, both transverse and longitudinal, air tight with cloth tape and sealant system equal to Hardcast DT-20 or Engineer approved equal. This includes all areas formed with drives and esses. Cloth duct tape or brushable sealer will not be allowed.
C.
All round branch runouts to diffusers and runouts to exhaust grills shall be provided with volume dampers. Each damper shall be close fitting and provide with an adjustment quadrant and locking device. Dampers shall be designed for a minimum of resistance to the flow of air.
D.
Dampers installed in rectangular duct shall be the opposed blade type.
E.
As a minimum main trunk ducts shall have a minimum thickness of 24 gauge steel and branch ducts shall have a minimum thickness of 26 gauge steel.
F.
Provide balancing dampers at all duct splits.
G.
Provide access doors at all dampers as required. Coordinate location of all access doors with architectural finish drawings. Show all access doors on coordination drawings.
H.
All duct seams shall be as recommended by SMACNA or ASHRAE for low and medium pressure applications.
I.
Fiberglass duct board is forbidden on this project.
FLEXIBLE DUCT
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 3
Muskogee Public Schools
2.3
2.4
Server Safe Room
2014
A.
Provide factory fabricated, insulated low pressure flexible duct with the following attributes: 1. Zinc coated spring steel helix for structural support, with 3" thick fiberglass insulation wrap and sheathed in a seamless vapor barrier jacket. 2. Interior fire resistive coating shall be included to resist erosion of the fiberglass insulation. 3. Flexible duct straight run sound absorption shall be no less than 3 db per foot and 5 db per foot sound absorption at 45 degree bends. 4. Flexible duct shall be factory fabricated in a composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, meeting Class 1 requirements of flame spread of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less as set forth in NFPA Bulletin 90-A, and bearing the UL label for use as an air duct. 5. Use no more than 48" of flexible duct in any one run and no greater than 90 degree total bend in any one run.
B.
Provide flexible duct in fully extended condition free from sags and kinks. The contractor shall adhere to the following installation conditions: 1. Use only the minimum length required to make the connection. 2. Do not exceed 48" of flexible duct total length. 3. Where horizontal support is required, provide at least 3/4" wide banding material hangers at not more than 24" centers. 4. Make joints and connections with 1/2" positive locking straps and attach the ends of the duct to the steel duct with duct tape. 5. Flexible duct shall have no greater than a 90 degree bend through the entire length of the run.
SPIRAL STEEL DUCT A.
Provide and install spiral galvanized steel duct for all round exposed duct applications. 1. Duct shall be equal to that manufactured by TSS Products. 2. Minimum thickness shall be 24 gauge on sizes 16" and smaller. 3. On sizes 16" thru 24" 22 gauge shall be used.
B.
All duct and fittings shall be joined using Keeting type connectors (as manufactured by Ward Industries) or equal connector system. 1. Install Keeting type connectors as per manufacturer’s instructions.
INSULATION A.
General: 1. Provide materials complying with Class 1 requirements of flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed of 50 or less as set fourth in NFPA Bulletin 90-A, and bearing UL label as an air duct. 2. Vapor barriers shall be provided intact and continuous throughout. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Owens/Corning Fiberglass b. Johns-Manville c. Certainteed d. PPG e. Krauff
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 4
Muskogee Public Schools
2.5
2.6
Server Safe Room
2014
B.
Concealed or exposed ducts in non-conditioned spaces: 1. Ducts shall be insulated with 0.75 lb. density 2" thickness of General Purpose Certainteed Fiberglass Duct insulation with a factory applied vinyl vapor barrier backing. Insulation shall be compressed as required for areas with minimal clearance. Use duct tape to compress the insulation where required. 2. All joints sealed by cementing 2" wide vapor seal tape on the insulation or by tapering with 3" wide strips of vapor barrier tape.
C.
Exterior ducts: 1. Ducts shall be insulated with 1.0 lb. density 2" thickness of Rigid Certainteed Fiberglass Duct insulation. 2. Entire exterior surface shall be coated with compatible waterproof mastic. Where visible to the public paint as per Architect’s directions.
D.
Entire supply and return air duct surface, backs of grilles and diffusers, and coil enclosures shall be insulated as described above.
E.
Exposed spiral steel duct installed in continuously conditioned space shall not be insulated. Insulate grill and diffuser transition boots and other items as required to eliminate condensation.
GRILLES AND REGISTERS A.
Ceiling diffusers, grilles, registers and duct mounted diffusers, grilles and registers as scheduled on Drawings.
B.
All grilles, registers and diffusers shall be install free of dings, burrs and other defects.
C.
Grilles, diffusers and registers shall be factory painted steel. All items shall be painted as directed by the Architect.
D.
Acceptable manufacturers shall include Titus, Metalaire, Barber-Coleman and Price.
AIR HANDLING UNITS A.
Provide horizontal or vertical air handling units as indicated on the Drawings and as indicated in this Specification.
B.
Cabinet and cabinet doors shall be fabricated using 18 gauge or thicker sheet steel with baked on enamel finish. Fan, fan motor and control components shall be removable from the front of the unit.
C.
Provide Flow control check valve type refrigerant control with each type of unit.
D.
Provide Farr 30/30 filters, 2" thick, with each unit. The Contractor shall make provisions for a filter section if a filter section is not integral to the cabinet.
E.
Cooling coils shall be installed within a steel or aluminum cabinet. Coils shall be fabricated from type ACR copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. All coils shall be factory tested
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 5
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
to 350 psi air pressure. Provide plastic drain pan with 3/4" drain connection under coil. Connect drain to nearest floor drain or plumbing vent using Oklahoma Department of Health approved indirect connection. F.
2.7
2.8
2.9
Acceptable manufacturers include: Trane, Carrier, York, and Rheem-Ruud.
CONDENSING UNITS A.
Provide condensing units as shown on the Drawings and as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
All condensing units compressors shall be the scroll type. Include crankcase heater on all compressors. All compressors shall be warranteed from the factory against defects for no less than 5 years.
C.
Provide liquid line solenoid valves and anti-short cycle timer with each condensing unit. Refrigerant shall be R-410A, factory charged.
D.
Minimum acceptable SEER rating is 16.00. Performance ratings shall be based on DOE test procedures 240 and 270.
E.
Cabinet shall be fabricated from heavy gauge, mild steel and factory coated with a rust inhibiting paint, minimum two coats.
F.
Coils shall be fabricated from 3/8" copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fin material. All coils shall be air pressure tested a the factory to no less than 375 psi.
G.
Refrigerant system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Provide low ambient control (to 0F) on each condensing unit.
H.
Acceptable manufacturers include: Trane, Carrier, York and Rheem-Ruud or engineer approved equal.
COOLING COILS A.
Coils shall be of the same manufacturer as the condensing units, no mismatched components will be allowed.
B.
Coils shall be manufactured using type ACR copper refrigeration tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fin material. All cooling coils shall be factory tested to no less than 375 psi.
C.
Coils shall be enclosed by a factory fabricated enclosure complete with plastic drain pan with 3/4" outlet connection. Coiling coil enclosures shall be insulated with a minimum of 1" of fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier, anti-erosion inner surface coating.
AIR FILTERS A.
Unit Filters:
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 6
Muskogee Public Schools
1. 2.
3.
2.10
2.11
2.12
Server Safe Room
2014
Provide Farr 30/30 filters, 2" thick, at each interior air handling unit. Provide Farr 30/30 filters 2" thick, at each rooftop air handling unit. Filters shall be of the non-woven cotton fabric type. The filter media shall have an average efficiency of 25-30% on ASHRAE Test Standard 62-76. If shall have an average arrestance of 90-92% in accordance with that test standard. The enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid, heavy-duty, high wet strength beverage board, with diagonal support members bonded to the air entering and air exiting side of each pleat, to ensure pleat stability.
LOUVERS A.
Where louvers are indicated provide louvers manufactured by Nystrom Building Products, Inc. or Engineer Approved Equal.
B.
Refer to and comply with all DIVISION 10 LOUVERS AND VENTS.
FIRE DAMPERS A.
Provide fire rated dampers where shown on the Drawings and as required where ducts penetrate fire rated walls or other assemblies. Verify wall assembly type on Architectural drawings.
B.
Fire dampers shall be U.L., N.F.P.A. or FMI rated for 1-1/2 hours when installed in a 1 hour rated wall and 3 hours when installed in a two or three hour rated wall.
C.
Fire dampers shall be U.L., N.F.P.A. or FMI rated for 2000 ft./min. and 4" wc. 1. Round dampers shall be constructed from 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal with ½" diameter actuator rod and bronze bearings. Round dampers shall be equal to Greenheck SMDR-53. 2. Rectangular dampers shall be constructed from 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, ½" diameter actuator rod and bronze bearings. Rectangular dampers shall be equal to Greenheck SMD-201. 3. Damper actuators shall be electric, 120 volt, single phase and equal to Greenheck MP2985E.
D.
Fire dampers shall be the shutter type with fusible link operating mechanism. Fusible link shall be rated for activation at 212F.
E.
Fire dampers shall be installed strictly according to manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturers installation instructions shall be included with the submittal information.
F.
Provide duct mounted access panels in locations where needed to facilitate reset of damper and replacement of fusible link.
G.
Acceptable manufacturers include: Ruskin or Greenheck
ROOF MOUNT EXHAUST FANS
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 7
Muskogee Public Schools
2.13
Server Safe Room
2014
A.
Exhaust fans shall be wall or roof mounted, centrifugal type and belt driven.
B.
The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
C.
Fan housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. The fan shroud shall have a rolled bead for added strength.
D.
Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be easily accessible for maintenance.
E.
Bearings shall be selected for a minimum life in excess of 200,000 hours. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of rated horsepower. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.
F.
A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. A fan conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of installation.
G.
All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings seal for sound and air performance. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification.
H.
Install all exhaust fans on a factory fabricated wall bracket, flash as required. Provide a gravity type backdraft damper with each exhaust fan.
I.
Acceptable manufacturers include Greenheck, Penn, Twin Cities Blower, New York Blower, Acme, Dayton, Hartzell, Cook, Cincinnati and Engineer approved equals.
GAS/ELECTRIC PACKAGE UNITS A.
Provide package, horizontal supply and return heating and cooling units as scheduled on the Drawings and as described in the Specifications. The operating range for each unit shall be from 0F to 115F. The cooling section shall operate along the entire range. Cooling capacity shall be factory tested based on current DOE and ARI test procedures. All units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R-410A and 100 percent run tested before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be color coded and numbered for maintenance purposes. Units shall be UL listed and labeled, classified in accordance to ANSI Z21.47 for gas fired central furnaces and UL 1995 for central air conditioning units. Unit shall include 0-25% manual fresh air damper or 2-100% economizer damper on unit as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phospatized and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Units surface shall be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet construction and design shall allow for access to all removable components from one side of the unit. Service panels shall have lifting handles. Unit top cover shall be one piece or where seams
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 8
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
exist, it shall be doubled hemmed and gasket sealed to prevent water leakage.
2.14
C.
Provide 2" thick Farr 30/30 filters or engineer approved equal with each unit. Sizes shall be as indicated in manufacturer's literature.
D.
All compressors shall be direct drive scroll type, hermetically sealed with gear type oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts. Motors shall be section gas cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage. All compressors shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffing to minimize vibration and transmitted noise. External discharge temperature limit, winding temperature limit and compressor overload shall be provided.
E.
All evaporator and condenser coils shall be fabricated using internally finned 3/8" copper tubes mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fins. Coils shall be factory leak tested to 200 psig and pressure tested to 450 psig. Each refrigerant circuit shall have an independent fixed orifice expansion device, service pressure ports and refrigerant line filter driers.
F.
The heating section shall have a drum and tube heat exchanger design using corrosion resistant steel components. A forced combustion blower shall supply premixed fuel to a single burner ignited by a pilotless hot surface ignition system. A negative pressure gas valve shall be used. This valve shall require blower operation to initiate gas flow. All gas heating sections shall be single stage and have an AFUE rating of no less than 90.0%.
G.
The outdoor fan shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the downflow discharge position. The indoor fan shall be direct drive, forward curve centrifugal fan. Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have built-in thermal overload protection.
H.
Acceptable manufacturers include: Trane, Carrier, York, Rheem-Ruud, or engineer approved equal.
I.
The Contractor shall provide and install an addressable smoke detector on the return duct of each unit. Smoke detector shall shut down unit upon activation.
OTHER MATERIALS A.
Provide other material, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and subject to approval of the Engineer and the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS A.
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning of installation indicates complete acceptance of existing conditions.
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 9
Muskogee Public Schools
3.2
3.4
3.5
3.6
2014
COORDINATION A.
3.3
Server Safe Room
Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. Coordinate exposed items with the Architectural finish drawings. Show and note the locations of all exposed items on the coordination drawings.
PREPARATION A.
Holes in concrete: 1. Provide sleeves, accurately dimensioned and shaped to permit passage of items of this section. 2. Deliver all such sleeves, with accurate setting Drawings and setting information, to the trades providing the surfaces through which such items must penetrate, and in a timely manner to assure inclusion in the Work.
B.
Flashing: 1. Where items of this Section penetrate the roof, outer walls, or waterproofing of any kind, provide under this Section all base flashing and counter-flashing required at such penetrations. 2. Provide on each pipe passing through the roof a 4 lb seamless lead flashing and counterflashing assembly.
EQUIPMENT INTERFACE A.
Provide all required shutoff valves, unions, and final connections of piping to the work of this Section. All items shall be installed in easily accessible locations.
B.
For electrically operated equipment, verify the electrical characteristics of this Section and provide equipment meeting those characteristics. Coordinate with electrical contractor as to all required starters and disconnects that are not factory supplied.
INSULATION A.
Wrap insulation firmly around ductwork, covering all surfaces including standing seams, and with all joints lapped at least 2".
B.
Securely fasten the insulation in place with 16 gauge soft annealed black or galvanized wire or plastic ties spaced approximately 12" on centers for straight runs and 3" on centers for elbows and fittings.
C.
Take special care to avoid excessive stretching and compressing, and to achieve securing at lapped sections where possible.
INSTALLATION A.
Unless otherwise directed by the Architects or the Engineers, ducts shall conform to the dimensions on the Drawings, and shall be straight and smooth, with joints neatly finished.
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 10
Muskogee Public Schools
3.7
3.8
Server Safe Room
2014
B.
Ducts shall be anchored securely to the building in an approved manner and installed so as to be free from vibration under all conditions of operation.
C.
Curved elbows have a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct, unless otherwise specified. Where curved elbows are shown curved elbows SHALL BE REQUIRED.
D.
Provide and install double wall turning vanes in all square elbows with a cross-sectional area of greater than 140 square inches.
E.
The contractor shall provide all necessary elbows, offsets and duct as required to provide a complete project. These items shall be provided where required even though these items may not specifically be indicated on the Drawings.
INSTRUCTIONS A.
Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and prior to its acceptance by the Owner, provide a qualified representative and fully instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of items provided under this Section. Conform to the requirements of DIVISION 01 - OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
B.
Before final payment will be made to the Contractor a complete maintenance manual, including all warranties, parts diagrams, factory help telephone numbers, maintenance manuals and other information as required by the Owner, shall be given to the Owner in a three ring binder. Conform to the requirements of DIVISION 01 - OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING A.
Test and adjust each piece of equipment and each system as required to assure proper balance and operation. 1. Test and regulate ventilation and air conditioning systems to conform to the air volumes shown on the approved design Drawings. 2. Make test and adjustments in apparatus and ducts for securing the proper volume and face distribution of air for each grill and ceiling outlet. 3. Where required, provide pulleys for fans at no additional cost to the Owner, and set to drive the fans the speed needed to give indicated volume. 4. For each system, take the following data in tabulated form: a. Air volumes at all supply, return, and exhaust outlets. b. Total cfm supplied c. Total cfm returned d. Total cfm exhausted (at each exhaust fan) e. Total static pressure at each fan and at each system. f. Motor speed, fan speed, and input ampere rating for each fan, rooftop unit and indoor air handling unit g. Water flow at each coil
B.
Submit four sets of test and balance reports to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall not receive final payment until this has been accomplished.
C.
Eliminate noise and vibration, and assure proper function of all controls, maintenance of
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 11
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
temperature, and operation in accordance with approved design. D.
Secure required approval from governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
E.
All balance work shall be accomplished by an Independent Balance Firm. PRIOR to final inspection the engineer shall receive and review a copy of the balance report.
F.
Conform to the applicable provisions of DIVISION 01 - STARTUP.
END OF SECTION
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
15600 - 12
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 15651 - REFRIGERATION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION A.
Work included: Provide piping where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following systems: 1. Refrigeration piping system, 2. Refrigeration specialties.
B.
Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
C.
Definitions: 1. The words "Mechanical Contractor" and "Contractor" shall indicate the same person in Division 15000 of this Specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Codes and regulations: 1. In addition to complying with the specific requirements, comply with pertinent and most recently issued regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Those agencies include, but are not limited to, the following: a. International Mechanical Code (IMC) b. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Codes and Standards c. American Society of Testing and Materials Pipe, Pipe Thread and Construction Specifications d. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. e. American Refrigeration Institute f. American National Standards Institute 2. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to provide compliance with the specified requirements. 3. The Mechanical Contractor shall submit a list of the manufacturers of all piping, fittings and
REFRIGERATION PIPING
15651-1
Muskogee Public Schools
4.
B.
1.4
1.6
2014
other devices not specifically scheduled on the Drawings. Shop drawings and other data as required to indicate method of installing and attaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.
All requests for substitutions not allowed by these Specifications shall be made in writing no later than one week prior to the bid date. All information received after that time shall not be considered.
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
1.5
Server Safe Room
Refer to Section 15400, 1.4.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.
The Drawings are a guide to the Contractor to show the general arrangement of equipment, piping and conduit. The Drawings have been carefully reviewed by the Engineer to avoid conflict between trades but due to the scale of the drawings conflicts between trades may arise. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the other trades and with the Engineer to ensure that this job is installed in a correct and timely manner. All conflicts are to be brought to the attention of the Engineer immediately and resolved with minimum impact to the overall project. By submitting a bid the Contractor acknowledges that adequate information has been provided for the successful completion of the project.
B.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials, equipment and labor to provide a complete and working system even though some material or equipment may not be shown on the Drawings.
C.
The Contractor shall note that the plenum working space is very minimal. The mechanical and electrical contractors shall coordinate as required to ensure that all spacing conflicts are resolved.
AS BUILT DRAWINGS A.
The Mechanical Contractor shall, as work progresses, prepare a set of Drawings indicating actual location of all piping, equipment, hangers, fixtures and cleanouts. The Drawings shall include actual dimensions as required to accurately depict all locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE SCHEDULE A.
2.2
Refrigeration piping: 1. Provide copper tube, type ACR, ASTM 280, copper No. 122, hard drawn temper for all refrigeration piping applications. 2. Use wrought copper fittings with solder joint and conforming to ANSI B16.22.
REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES A.
Accessories 1. Refrigerant strainers shall have brass shell and end connections, brazed joints, monel screen (100 mesh), UL listed and 300 psi working pressure.
REFRIGERATION PIPING
15651-2
Muskogee Public Schools
2.
3. 4. 5.
B.
2.3
2.4
Server Safe Room
2014
Moisture-Liquid Indicators shall be constructed using forged brass, single port, removable cap, polished optical glass and solder type connections. The indicator shall be UL listed, 200F temperature rating and 500 psi working pressure. Refrigerant dryer-filters shall be corrosion resistant, spring loaded with replaceable core dryers for high water-acid content removal. Suction, Oil Pressure and Discharge gauges shall consist of liquid filled (glycerin) assemblies with a positive shut off valve. Provide suction accumulators where total length of refrigerant piping exceeds 75 feet. Accumulators shall be UL listed, 200F temperature rating and 500 psi working pressure.
Refrigeration Valves 1. Provide and install isolation valves as indicated on the Drawings and as required for complete component isolation. Provide Henry or Engineer approved equal with bronze joints and 400 psi working pressure. Contractor shall provide isolation of coil and condensing unit. 2. Ball valves shall be used for bypass applications. Provide Mueller or Engineer approved equal with bronze joints and 400 psi working pressure. 3. Refrigeration check valves shall be Mueller refrigeration type or Engineer approved equal with bronze joints and 400 psi working pressure. 4. Provide evacuation and charging ports as indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper system operation. Provide Schrader type or Engineer approved equal. These valves shall be used for charging and evacuation of refrigerant and shall have a working pressure rating of 400 psi.
REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION A.
Refrigerant Piping (gas piping) shall be insulated with 1" Armaflex 22 insulation with all joints sealed with adhesive recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
B.
All pipe insulation shall be protected from hangers using 20 gauge galvanized steel plates curved to conform to the radius of the pipe insulation.
SLEEVES A.
Where pipes pass through fire rated concrete, masonry or stud walls, or pass through ceilings, provide Proset System A fireproof sleeving system or Engineer approved equal with proper sized sleeves. All fire rated sleeves shall be U.L. listed.
B.
In all non-fire rated concrete, masonry or stud walls, provide a schedule 40 PVC sleeve two sizes great the pipe penetrating the wall. The void space between the outer pipe wall and inner wall of the sleeve shall be filled with cotton rope or other suitable packing material. Pipe shall be sealed in place with Engineer approved butyl caulk. Chrome plated escutcheons shall be provided on either side of pipe sleeves where pipes are below ceilings or in other areas accessible to the public.
C.
Where refrigerant pipe must be located under building slab, below sidewalk or parking area or below grade the pipes shall be sleeved in a schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeve for the entire below grade length of the pipe run.
REFRIGERATION PIPING
15651-3
Muskogee Public Schools
D.
2.5
2014
Where refrigerant piping is exposed in the building the piping shall be protected with a schedule 40 PVC sleeve. This sleeve shall run continuous from the air handling units to the outside wall. Refer to the drawings for further information.
SOLDER FOR REFRIGERANT PIPING A.
2.6
Server Safe Room
Brazing Material: 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall use Sil-fos or equal brazing material. 2. Material shall comply with SFA 5.8, Part C, Section 2, ASME Boiler and Pressure Code.
OTHER MATERIALS A.
Provide other material, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and subject to approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXISTING CONDITIONS A.
3.2
COORDINATION A.
3.3
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL A.
General: 1. Proceed as rapidly as the building construction will permit. 2. Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude dirt until fixtures are installed and final connections have been made. 3. Cut pipe accurately, and work into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing windows, doors, and other openings. Excessive cutting or other weakening of the building will not be permitted. 4. Install piping products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of ANSI B31.5 and in accordance with recognized insustry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. 5. Charge pipe with dry nitrogen while constructing joints. 6. All joints shall be made with the proper fittings. No field fabricated increasers or reducers will be allowed. 7. Cap and seal ends of piping when not connected to mechanical equipment.
REFRIGERATION PIPING
15651-4
Muskogee Public Schools
3.4
3.6
2014
PIPE JOINTS A.
3.5
Server Safe Room
Copper tubing: 1. Cut square, remove burrs, and clean inside of female filling to a bright finish. a. Apply solder flux with a brush to tubing. b. Remove internal parts of solder-end valves prior to soldering. 2. Provide dielectric unions at points of connection of copper tubing to ferrous piping and equipment.
SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A.
Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and ceilings. 1. Set pipe sleeves in place before concrete is poured. 2. For uninsulated pipe, provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through, or provide minimum of 1/2" clearance between inside and outside of the pipe. 3. For insulated pipe, provide sleeves of adequate size to accommodate the full thickness of pipe covering, with clearance for packing and caulking.
B.
Caulk the space between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering, using a noncombustible, permanently plastic, waterproof, non-staining compound which leaves a smooth finished appearance, or pack with noncombustible asbestos cotton, rope, or fiberglass to within 1/2" of both ends and provide the waterproof compound described above.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING A.
Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping in accordance wtih ANSI B31.5. Use freon-nitrogen mixture to test low side at 130 psig minimum and high side at 125% of high pressure safety device psig minimum.
B.
Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. Any repair welding shall be accomplished under a nitrogen-charged system (above atmospheric pressure).
C.
The Contractor shall perform a complete dehydration of all piping a minimum of three times to minimum 1000 microns vacuum for 15 minutes with evacuation equipment disconnected prior to charging refrigerant. The Engineer shall be present for this procedure.
END OF SECTION
REFRIGERATION PIPING
15651-5
Muskogee Public Schools
REFRIGERATION PIPING
Server Safe Room
2014
15651-6
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
DESCRIPTION A.
Work included: Provide all labor, material, equipment, fees, service and permits to install the complete electrical system as shown on the Drawings and Specifications. Upon completion of the work, the system shall be in perfect working condition. The work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Installation of the facility electrical service including all conductor, conduit, panel board and other electrical equipment shown on the Drawings and as required for a complete and operating system. The facilities service is four wire, three phase, 208Y/120 volts;
B.
Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.
C.
Definitions: 1. The words "Electrical Contractor" and "Contractor" shall indicate the same person in Division 16 of this Specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Codes and regulations: 1. In addition to complying with the specific requirements, comply with pertinent and most recently issued regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Those agencies include, but are not limited to, the following: a. National Electrical Code (NEC), latest edition, as amended or supplemented by the authority having local jurisdiction, b. The National Electric Safety Code (NESC), 2. In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to provide compliance with the specified requirements. 3. The Electrical Contractor shall submit a list of the manufacturers of all panel boards, disconnects, fuses, breakers, conduit connectors and other devices not specifically scheduled on the Drawings. 4. Shop drawings and other data as required to indicate method of installing and attaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
1.5
2014
B.
All requests for substitutions shall be made in writing no later than one week prior to the bid date. All information received after that time shall not be considered.
C.
Submit in accordance with DIVISION 01, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS.
D.
Coordination Drawings: In accordance with DIVISION 01, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Provide detailed layout drawings of all conduit and conductor systems using the BIM CAD system. Coordinate completely with the Architectural documents as well as ALL other subcontractors Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit under the pertinent section rather than under this section. 1. Submit electric motor data and variable speed drive data with the driven equipment. 2. Equipment and materials identification. 3. Fire-stopping materials. 4. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and constant support hangers. 5. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.
E.
Coordination Drawings: In accordance with DIVISION 01, GENERAL CONDITIONS, Article, SUBCONTRACTS AND WORK COORDINATION. Provide detailed layout drawings of all piping and duct systems. In addition provide details of the following. 1. Mechanical and Electrical equipment rooms. 2. Interstitial space. 3. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing. 4. Conduit sleeves. 5. Conduit or equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.
F.
Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: 1. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment. 2. Provide a listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment.
PRODUCT HANDLING A.
1.6
Server Safe Room
In general, all equipment, materials and fixtures shall be protected from theft, vandalism and harmful effects of weather.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.
The Drawings are a guide to the Contractor to show the general arrangement of equipment, panels, switches and conduit. The Drawings have been carefully reviewed by the Engineer to avoid conflict between trades but due to the scale of the drawings conflicts between trades may arise. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the other trades and with the Architect and the Engineer to ensure that this job is installed in a correct and timely manner. All conflicts are to be brought to the attention of the Engineer immediately and resolved with minimum impact to the overall project. By submitting a bid the Contractor acknowledges that adequate information has been provided for the successful completion of the project.
B.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials, equipment and labor to provide a complete and working system even though some material or equipment may not be shown on the Drawings.
C.
Great care has been given to locations of ducts, diffusers, grilles and light fixtures. The Contractor shall note that the plenum working space is very minimal. The mechanical and electrical contractors shall coordinate as required to ensure that all spacing conflicts are resolved.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools 1.7
The Electrical Contractor shall, as work progresses, prepare a set of Drawings indicating actual location of all conduit, equipment, hangers, fixtures and misc. The Drawings shall include actual dimensions as required to accurately depict all locations. The drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of DIVISION O1 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.
SYSTEM TEST A.
1.9
2014
AS BUILT DRAWINGS A.
1.8
Server Safe Room
An operating test shall be conducted after the installation is complete and at such time as directed by the Architect and Engineer. A demonstration showing that the equipment will operate in accordance with these Specifications is required. The test will be performed in the presence of the Engineer or his designated representative. This test shall also include testing of any ground fault devices in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. All instruments and personnel required to perform this test shall be furnished by the Contractor, and the power will be furnished by the Owner. Notify in writing no later than 48 hours prior to all scheduled tests.
GUARANTEE A.
A written certificate shall be furnished guaranteeing all materials, equipment and labor furnished to be free of all defects for a period of not less than one (1) year after the date of final acceptance of the work by the Owner. If any defects appear within this stipulated time, such repair or replacement shall be completed without charge.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
All materials and equipment shall conform to standards set by the National Electric Code (NEC), latest edition, Underwriter’s Laboratories, state and local agencies. Materials shall be new and of equal or greater quality than those specified.
B.
All miscellaneous hardware and materials used for mounting and installation of the electrical system shall be galvanized.
SPECIAL OCCUPANCIES A.
Provide NEMA 1 rated on building interior as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXISTING CONDITIONS A.
3.2
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work indicates that all existing conditions are acceptable.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. Coordinate exposed items with the Architectural finish drawings. Show and note the locations of all exposed items on the coordination drawings.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 3
Muskogee Public Schools
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
A.
Circuit sizes and electrical requirements of equipment specified under other sections of these specifications shall be verified, prior to ordering any equipment, by the Contractor to ensure that their requirements are consistent with the Drawings. If a discrepancy exists, it shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention before proceeding with the work.
B.
Coordinate all electrical work with architectural and other trades to insure proper execution of the work and general progress for the entire project.
LOCATIONS A.
The locations of equipment furnished under other sections of the specifications shall be located referring to the other Contractor’s shop drawings prior to locating. The outlines of equipment shown on the Mechanical and Electrical drawings are intended to be used as a general guide relative to other electrical, mechanical and architectural items. If conflicts prevent installation of electrical work at the locations indicated, deviations shall be made subject to acceptance by the Architect and Engineer, and without additional compensation.
B.
Minor Location Changes: Minor location changes of switches, receptacles and miscellaneous outlets shall be permitted to be made by the Architect, Engineer or Owner prior to rough in, where construction conflicts or operational advantage warrant the change. These minor changes shall be made at no cost by the Contractor.
SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A.
Provide sleeves for each conduit passing through walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and ceilings. 1. Set conduit sleeves in place before concrete is poured. 2. For conduit in non-concrete walls, provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the conduit passing through, or provide minimum of ½" clearance between inside and outside of the conduit.
B.
All penetrations by electrical raceways or equipment through walls or floors shall be sealed with fire retardant silicone foam equal to CTC PR 855 as supplied by Chase Technology Corporation or with 3M Fire Barrier CP25 Caulk and Fire Barrier Putty 303 as manufactured by the 3M company.
HOME RUNS All home runs in advance of construction shall be circuited as shown on the Drawings unless written approval is obtained from the Engineer. The alternative presented must show exact conduit routing, junction box location and total circuit wattage. If the change is accepted by the Architect and Engineer, the contractor shall note all appropriate information on the record drawing. No two underground conductors shall be connected to the same underground phase in the panel.
CONDUIT A.
3.8
2014
GENERAL INFORMATION
A.
3.7
Server Safe Room
All conduits installed shall be neat, parallel to building lines and properly anchored. All conduit sleeves and fittings shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS - INSTALLED AND WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR A.
The wiring for all electrical equipment including motors and other electrically operated equipment specified in this and other sections of the Specifications shall be furnished and installed by the
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 4
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
Contractor. All circuits shall be completed and left in satisfactory working condition except where noted on the Drawings or in other Sections. The suitability of equipment supplied by other trades shall be checked by the Contractor by consulting applicable wiring diagrams. The Electrical Subcontractor shall supply and install all cords and plugs necessary for equipment connections.
3.9
B.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials for rough-in and final connections to electrical equipment including disconnect switches, wiring, conduit, outlets and plates and other materials not specified in the other equipment sections under the individual item, but necessary for a complete and working system. Any of the above items specified under other equipment sections shall be furnished loose to the Electrical Subcontractor for installation.
C.
No additional compensation shall be considered for failure to properly interpret responsibility of other trades.
D.
The Contractor shall locate all equipment by consulting shop drawings and coordinating locations with other trades, Architect, Owner and General Contractor.
EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A.
3.10
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A.
3.11
Permanent nameplates shall be furnished and installed by the contractor for each electrical device other than lighting outlets, wall switches and convenience receptacles. In addition, each component unit mounted on a panel or cabinet shall have a permanent nameplate. In addition, the fuse, breaker or main lug only size shall be engraved on the nameplate. It shall be permanently attached with machine or sheet metal screws and shall be no smaller than 3/4"x2" with ½" tall letters. Nameplates shall have engraved white letters on a black background.
Furnish and install temporary power and lighting, as needed and as required for construction illumination and power requirements and for safety purposes. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to obtain and pay for any utility charges associated with “construction power”.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A.
Provide the Architect with four copies of hard bound manuals for the project, a maximum of fifteen days prior to final acceptance of the project. Manuals shall include copies of all corrected and approved shop drawings, schedules, catalog data, installation and maintenance illustrations, performance curves, rating data, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, manufacturer’s recommendations, operating instructions, maintenance instructions, spare parts lists and all other information for the specified equipment and systems. Manuals shall include a type written schedule of each motor, giving nameplate data, switch and fuse or breaker size and voltage and phase(s) at motor terminals. Provide in compliance with the requirements herein and as per DIVISION 01 - OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16010 - 5
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND TRENCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION A.
1.3
Work included: Provide and electrical conduit system, furnished and installed in accordance with the Drawings and specifications. Conduit shall include all fittings and supports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with DIVISION 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONDUIT A.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit may be used for underground or in poured concrete and shall be used in all electrically hazardous locations. Three-fourths (3/4") inch shall be the minimum size of conduit allowed. PVC conduit may extend no more than 2" above finished slab.
B.
Rigid non-metallic conduit may be used for service entrance, feeders and branch circuits with the following requirements: 1. Conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC or thicker wall PVC, 2. The conduit shall be embedded in the soil below the aggregate and shall be at least 12 inches below finished floor. 3. PVC conduits shall not be used in suspended floor slabs. 4. All conduit bends subject to physical abuse and damage and turning up through the floor shall be metal, either rigid or IMC. 5. A grounding conductor shall be provided in each conduit.
C.
Aluminum conduit shall be utilized on the exterior of the building and in all wet and corrosive locations.
D.
In wet and corrosive locations, all sealtights shall be Cafflex manufactured by Carlon and all fittings shall be by Carlon and shall be liquid tight, non-metallic.
E.
Steel EMT conduit systems or MC flexible cable systems shall be used in concealed and exposed above grade locations. 1. Minimum MC cable size is 3/4".
F.
Conduits shall be installed in compliance with the following codes: 1. Rigid conduit Article 346, NEC 2. EMT Article 348, NEC
RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND TRENCHES
16110 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools 3. 4.
2.2
Rigid Non-Metallic MC flexible cable systems
Server Safe Room
2014 Article 347, NEC Article 330, NEC
G.
A grounding conductor shall be installed in each conduit. Conduit shall not be used as a grounding conductor.
H.
MC cable may be used on all above ground branch circuits. Size shall be manufacturer’s standard for amperage rating of conductors.
CONDUIT FITTINGS A.
Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be as manufactured by the Youngstown Sheet and Tube Company or approved equal. Couplings shall be the compression type. Set screw fittings are prohibited on this job.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION A.
Conduit systems shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlets to cabinets and pull or junction boxes. Conduit systems shall be rigid steel, electrical metallic tubing (EMT), Metal Clad cable (MC), rigid non-metallic polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyvinyl chloride coated rigid electrical conduit as specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings. Lock nuts and bushings shall secure the system in such a way as to be electrically continuous throughout. Conduit ends shall be capped to prevent entrance of foreign materials during construction.
B.
Conduits shall be run parallel to building lines and long sweep bends shall be utilized.
C.
If No. 4 or larger conductors enter a cabinet, pullbox, junction box or auxiliary gutter, the conductors shall be protected by a bushing. On all conduits one and one fourth inches (1-1/4") and larger insulated bushings shall be utilized.
D.
Ropes or heavy duty pull strings shall be installed in all empty or spare conduits to facilitate the pulling of future conductors.
E.
The contractor shall provide sleeves in accordance with DIVISION 16.
F.
Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to conform with the details and applications indicated. 1. Provide necessary support for all equipment and accessories as required. This includes, but is not limited to, frames or supports for items such as transformers, fans, electrical panels and other similar items requiring supports. Floor mounted equipment shall be set on a 4" high concrete housekeeping pad.
TRENCHING A.
Whenever possible, all exterior conduit and wiring systems shall be installed with a minimum of 24" of cover. All trenches less than 24" shall be filled with flowable concrete fill. Banks of trenches shall be kept as vertical as practical and, where required, shall be properly sheeted and braced. Rock shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 4" below trench depth specified. Overdepth shall be backfilled with loose, moist sand and thoroughly tamped. Any water accumulated in the trench shall be removed by pumping prior to backfilling.
B.
Trenches shall be backfilled with excavated materials approved for backfilling or other materials free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in carefully compacted lifts, 6" high.
RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND TRENCHES
16110 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools C.
Server Safe Room
2014
Existing utility lines to be retained, whether known or uncovered during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during operations, shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling and, if damaged, shall be restored to original condition. END OF SECTION
RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND TRENCHES
16110 - 3
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16121 - CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS - GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
DESCRIPTION A.
Work included: Provide electrical power wire and cable systems as indicated in this Specification. This shall include wire, cable connectors and other accessories as required to provide a complete and functional power system.
B.
Signal and control wire and cable systems shall include all wire, cable, connectors and other accessories required to provide the complete system indicated on the Drawings and Specifications.
C.
Class 1 control wiring shall be a minimum size of No. 14 AWG. Control wiring shall be in compliance with NEC requirements and any other applicable Specifications or regulations.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.4
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with DIVISION 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
POWER CONDUCTORS A.
All wire and cable shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and shall be soft drawn copper unless otherwise noted. Wire and cable shall be new and permanently marked with size, grade of insulation, voltage and manufacturer’s name on the outer covering at regular intervals.
B.
Each conductor and the neutral conductor shall be factory color coded with a separate color for each. The color code indicated below shall be used consistently throughout the electrical system installation, unless specified:
C.
PHASE
208V/120V
A B C Neutral Ground
Black Red Blue White Green
Type THWN or THHN wire shall be installed in raceways above grade in permanent dry locations.
Conductors and Connectors - General
16121 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools D. 2.2
2.3
2.4
Server Safe Room
2014
Type THW or THWN wire shall be used in raceways exposed to moisture, in concrete slabs, fill or below grade.
POWER CONNECTORS A.
Connectors for branch circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be a tapered spirally wound square spring with a hard insulating cover, commonly known as a “wirenut”. The skirt on the insulated cover shall be of a size and designed to prevent exposure of any bare conductor when properly installed.
B.
Connectors on circuits with copper conductors larger than No. 10 AWG shall be power cable compression type, hex screw or bolt clamp type. Connectors shall be highly conductive and corrosion resistant.
C.
Connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall have not less than two clamping elements or compression indents.
D.
Splices and joints shall be insulated with material approved for the particular use, location, voltage and temperature.
CONTROL CONDUCTORS A.
Conductors shall be annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than 98 percent pure copper.
B.
All signal and control conductors shall be stranded.
C.
Minimum conductor size shall be No. 14 AWG. 1. The following Belden cables shall be exempt from the minimum conductor size: 9535, 9941 and 9841.
D.
Conductors shall be UL listed as suitable for Class 2 circuits. Conductors installed within buildings shall be UL listed a resistant to spread of fire.
E.
Control cable shall be color coordinated in accordance with NEMA WC-30.
F.
All twisted pair cable shall be Belden or General Cable. Shielding shall be over each individual conductor.
CONTROL CONNECTORS A.
Connectors shall be of highly conductive and corrosion resistant materials.
B.
All terminations shall be made by using nylon insulated spade type lugs. Lugs shall be Burndy, Hubbell or Leviton.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
All cable shall be continuous form origin to panel or equipment termination without running splice.
B.
No more than three circuits shall be contained in each home run for branch circuits.
C.
Wrap around labels with numbering designations shall mark control wiring in each box and at each termination. It shall correspond with a detailed wiring diagram. All control wire shall be stranded.
Conductors and Connectors - General
16121 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
D.
The Contractor shall use due care to prevent damage to the conductor and insulation during installation. Conductors shall not be installed in conduit or raceways until the raceway system is complete. Control conductors to be pulled in a single conduit shall be pulled together.
E.
The Contractor is required to conduct insulation tests with a 500 volt DC megger after installation is complete. This test will be performed in the presence of the Architect and the Engineer and the contractor shall furnish all equipment and personnel necessary to conduct the test. Notify Architect and Engineer no less than 48 hours prior to each scheduled test.
F.
Control wiring lugs shall be installed on the conductor using a dimple type crimper. Dimple shall be made on the spade side of the barrel.
G.
Control wiring shall be labeled with a conductor designation that corresponds to the wiring diagrams and schematic Drawings. END OF SECTION
Conductors and Connectors - General
16121 - 3
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
The electrical wiring devices are shown by symbols on the Drawings as a part of the overall electrical systems and also shown on the Electrical Symbol Legend.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Wiring devices shall be “Specification Grade” or better.
C.
Products from the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. General Electric 2. Hubbell 3. Pass and Seymour 4. Bryant 5. Leviton
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with DIVISION 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
DEVICES A.
Provide wiring devices of the type, color and electrical rating for the service indicated.
B.
The types of electrical wiring devices required for the project include the following: 1. Receptacles a. General Duty Duplex: Duplex general duty type receptacles shall be 2 pole, 3 wire grounding with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminal internally connected to mounting yoke, 15 and 20 amp, 125 volt with metal plaster ears, side wiring ONLY, NEMA configuration 5-15R and 5-20R unless and except where otherwise indicated. Submit complete color selection in the submittal process. Comply with Architects color scheme. b. Weatherproof Receptacles: Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of the receptacle type indicated, mounted in a box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and separate cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification attachment plugs are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. c. GFI Receptacles: Ground fault interrupter receptacles shall be fed through type capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, grounding
Wiring Devices
16140 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
2.
3.
Server Safe Room
2014
type, UL rated Class A, Group 1, 20 amp rating, 125 volts with solid state ground fault sensing and signaling, with 5 milliampere ground fault trip level, equipped with 20 amp plug configuration, NEMA 5-20R. d. All ground receptacles shall be Hubbell No. IG 5352 or Leviton 6898/6899. e. All other receptacles shall be of the appropriate type and voltage. f. L6-30 and L5-20 twist lock receptacles shall be Hubbell No. HBL. Toggle Switches: Wall switches shall be general duty, totally enclosed with bodies of phenolic compound, butt contact, quiet AC type, with an integral mounting strap with provisions for side wiring and securely held binding screws, color coded for current rating. a. 120 volt circuits: 20 amps at 120 volts AC Device plates shall be one piece type, single or multiple gang switch and duplex outlet wall plates for wiring devices, provide metal screws for securing plates to devices, screw heads colored to match finish of plate and wall plates possessing the following: a. For unfinished walls, plates shall be galvanized sheet steel or galvanized cast metal with rounded or beveled edges. b. Plastic device plates shall be non-combustible, mar-proof, thermosetting with 0.100 inch thickness minimum. Submit complete color selection in the submittal process. Comply with Architects color scheme.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install all wiring devices as per NEC and as per manufacturer’s directions. END OF SECTION
Wiring Devices
16140 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all disconnects as noted on the Drawings and as described in this Specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Products from the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. General Electric 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Square D 4. Seimans-ITE
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with DIVISION 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SAFETY SWITCHES A.
Provide fusible or non-fusible switches as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Switches shall have the following features: 1. Switch mechanism shall be the quick make, quick break type. 2. Copper blades, visible in the OFF position. 3. An arc chute for each pole. 4. External operating handle shall indicate ON and OFF positions and shall have lock-open provisions for padlock applications. 5. Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the door only when the switch is in the OFF position defeatable by a special tool to permit inspection. 6. Where fuses are indicated and required, fuse holders shall be provided that accept only Class R fuses. 7. Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which includes a neutral conductor. 8. Enclosures: a. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the Drawings for the switches. b. Where the type of switch enclosures are not shown, they shall be NEMA N Type 1 for indoor applications and NEMA Type 3R and 4 for outdoor applications.
C.
Switches shall be heavy duty and horsepower rated.
DISCONNECTS
16170 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install all safety switches where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Install as per all applicable provisions of the NEC and National Electrical Contractors Association’s “Standard of Installation” and in accordance with recognized industry practices. END OF SECTION
DISCONNECTS
16170 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16400 - PANELBOARDS AND FUSE BLOCKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish panelboards and overcurrent protective devices as required for this project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Products from the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. General Electric 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Square D 4. Siemans 5. Eaton
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with DIVISION 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
PANELBOARDS A.
Each panelboard shall consist of the required one-pole, two-pole and three pole branches of the ratings shown on the Drawings. It shall be of deadfront construction equivalent to the types shown on the Panelboard Schedules. Panelboards shall be equipped with copper bussing. Aluminum busses are not acceptable.
B.
All circuits controlled out of a panelboard or by a breaker shall be identified. A directory holder with neatly typed circuit directory shall be permanently affixed to the inside door of the panelboard.
C.
Panelboards and circuit breakers shall comply with all pertinent sections of the NEC. Panelboard enclosures shall be fitted with hinged doors having a combination lock and latch with all locks keyed the same. Enclosure shall be painted with a baked light gray enamel or lacquer finish over a suitable, rust inhibiting primer coat.
D.
For indoor locations provide NEMA 1 rated panels and assemblies. For exterior locations subject to the weather provide NEMA 3R rain tight panels and assemblies.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS A.
Circuit breakers shall be U.L. listed. All multiple circuit breakers, individual or in panelboards shall be common trip type. Twin, tandem and half-size single pole breakers are unacceptable.
Panelboards and Fuse Blocks
16400 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
2.3
Server Safe Room
2014
B.
Circuit breakers shall be rated for the actual fault current available. Series ratings of breakers is acceptable. Contractor shall coordinate between the local power company and circuit breaker manufacturer to determine the appropriate fault current rating.
C.
Furnish bolt-on type branch and main circuit breakers. Furnish frame sizes, trip settings and number of poles as indicated. Clearly and visibly mark circuit breakers with ampere trip rating.
D.
Furnish all breakers with quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanisms and thermal-magnetic, inverse time-limit overload and instantaneous short circuit protection on all poles, unless otherwise indicated. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by the breaker handle assuming a clearly distinctive position from the manual ON and OFF position. Furnish breaker handle that is trip free on overloads. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip.
E.
Do not use single pole breakers with handle ties or bails in lieu of multi-pole breakers.
F.
Ensure that voltage and interrupting rating of all breakers in a panelboard is not less than voltage and short circuit rating of the panelboard main buses, as indicated. Furnish breakers suitable to operate satisfactorily at the frequency indicated.
G.
Furnish ground fault interrupter circuit breakers for certain circuits as indicated on the drawings.
H.
Furnish single pole breakers with full module size. Do not install two pole breakers in a single module.
I.
Breakers terminals to be solderless lug type.
FUSES A.
All fuses for switches and panelboards shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Cartridge type fuses shall be Bussman as indicated below: Description 0 - 600 amps
Fuse LPN-RK (250V) LPS-RK (600 V) KRP-C LPN-RK (250 V) LPS-RK (600 V)
601 - 6000 amps Motors less than 480 amps
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install all panelboards, fuse blocks and circuit breakers as per NEC and as per manufacturer’s directions. END OF SECTION
Panelboards and Fuse Blocks
16400 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all electrical lighting fixtures complete with lamps on the Lighting Fixture Schedule.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Wiring devices shall be “Specification Grade” or better.
C.
Products shall be as Specified unless written prior approval is obtained.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submittals shall be made in accordance with DIVISION 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
LIGHT FIXTURES A.
All fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic. Acceptable manufacturers of fluorescent light fixtures are Williams, Lithonia, Cooper, Columbia and as shown on the Drawings.
B.
All components shall conform to the general requirements and to U.L. Standards.
C.
Light Fixture Wiring: 1. Fixture wiring shall be large enough to handle the individual or combined power loads of each fixture, but in no case shall it be smaller than #14 AWG, type AF stranded copper wire. The fixtures shall be U.L. listed for use in wet locations where “wet” areas are noted on the Drawings. In all other areas fixtures shall be U.L. listed. 2. General lighting system branch conductors shall be installed in conduit form the panelboards to outlets and between outlets as indicated on the Drawings. 3. No. 12 wire shall be the smallest conductor for any lighting branch circuit.
D.
Custom fixtures shall be as listed on the drawings and as called out on the Light Fixture Schedule.
LAMPS A.
Lighting
Fluorescent Lamps: Fluorescent lamps shall be of the wattage and voltage as indicated on the fixture schedule. Lamps shall have an average rated life of not less than 18,000 hours. Lumen output at 70% rated life shall be not less than 80% of initial output. Any lamp failing during the first 200 days of burning shall be considered defective and shall be replaced without cost by the Electrical Contractor. All troffer fixtures shall have color corrected lamps - 3700K or as
16500 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
per Owners instructions. B.
2.3
Lighting
LED Lamps: Light Emitting Diode lamps shall be of the wattage and voltage as indicated on the light fixture schedule. Lamps shall have an average rated life of not less than 100,000 hours. Any lamp or fixture failing within the first year of usage shall be considered defective and shall be replaced without cost by the Electrical Contractor.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A.
Fluorescent ballasts shall be physically interchangeable with industry standard electronic ballasts. Ballast shall be provided with poke in wire trap connectors color coded as per ANSI C82.11.
B.
Ballast performance shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Ballasts shall be programmed Start 2. Electronic ballasts shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without restarting power. 3. Dimming Ballasts shall be provided with integral protection circuitry to withstand connection of low voltage control leads to mains power supply. In this event, ballast shall default to maximum light output. 4. Ballasts shall operate from 50/60 Hz input source of 120 volts or 277 volts with sustained variations of +/-10 % (voltage or frequency) with no damage to the ballasts. 5. Ballast shall have a Power Factor greater than 0.98 at full light output (all types) and greater than 0.90 through the dimming range for the primary lamp (dimming type). 6. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor of 1.00 at maximum light output (all types) and 0.03 at minimum light output for primary lamp (dimming type). 7. Ballasts shall provide for a Lamp Current Crest Factor of 1.7 or less throughout the entire range. 8. Ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10% when operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp. 9. Ballasts shall have a Class A sound rating. 10. Ballasts used in outdoor applications shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0F. Ballasts used in indoor applications, including dimming ballasts, shall have a minimum starting temperature of 50F. 11. Ballasts shall provide Lamp EOL Protection Circuit for all T5, T5HO, T8, T8HO and CFL lamps. 12. Ballasts shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage. 13. Standard electronic ballasts shall have hi-low switching option when operating 4 lamps (4 or 2) or when operating 3 lamps (3, 2 or 1). 14. Dimming ballasts shall control lamp output from 100% to 1%.
C.
Ballasts shall not contain any Polychlorinated Biphenyl compounds (PCB).
D.
Ballast shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed, Class P and Type 1 outdoor. Ballast shall comply with ANSI C62.41 Category A for Transient protection. Ballast shall comply with ANSI C82.11 where applicable.
E.
Ballasts manufacturer shall have a 10 year history of producing electronic ballasts for the North American market.
F.
Ballasts shall have a 1 year warranty from the date of installation.
G.
Ballast Schedule 1. Standard Electronic Ballast (T5, T8) 2. Dimming Electronic Ballast (T5, T8) 3. Dimming Electronic Ballast (PL, PL-L) 4. Equals with Engineers Approval
Phillips Centium Phillips Advance Mark 7 Phillips Advance Mark 10
16500 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools 2.4
Server Safe Room
2014
BATTERY BACKUP A.
Provide Bodine or equal battery back up where indicated on the drawings, at designated emergency, exit, emergency/exit, exterior fixtures at exit doors and as required by applicable code. Battery life shall be a minimum of 45 minutes or longer as required by applicable code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION A.
3.2
3.3
Light fixtures shall be suspended from structural members or from ceiling structural members, minimum 1-1/2" channels, by standard bar hangers or other Architect and Engineer approved methods. Under No circumstances will light fixtures be supported from the ceiling, excluding exit lights.
TEMPORARY LIGHTING A.
Temporary lighting shall be installed by the Contractor as required. Lighting shall be installed to provide 15 fc in work locations and as required by the General Contractor or Owner.
.
After the permanent fixtures have been installed, the temporary lighting may be supplied by utilizing the new fixtures. New lamps shall be installed throughout, when directed by the Architect and Engineer, approximately thirty days prior to final acceptance. Lamps previously in use become the property of the Owner.
SPARE LAMPS A.
Three spare lamps for each type installed, or 5% or each type installed, whichever is greater, shall be turned over to the Owner upon final acceptance. END OF SECTION
Lighting
16500 - 3
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
SECTION 16620 - NATURAL GAS FUELED PACKAGE GENERATOR SET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
STANDARDS A. References and Standards The generator set covered by these specifications shall be designed, tested, rated, assembled and installed in strict accordance with all applicable standards below: CSA C22.2 No14 CSA 282 CSA 100 EN61000-6 EN55011 FCC Part 15 Subpart B ISO8528 IEC61000 UL508 UL2200 UL142 Designed to allow for installed compliance to NFPA 70, NFPA99 and NFPA 110
1.2
1.3
WORK INCLUDED A.
Provide all labor, materials and equipment to furnish, install and place in operation a diesel power generation system in accordance with the contract documents and manufacturer's drawings and installation instructions. These specifications also describe requirements for the design, fabrication and testing of the power system. The total installation shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
The installation of the power generation system shall include the following: Engine-driven generator set Control system Cooling system Connection between existing underground diesel tanks and base fuel tank Generator set accessories Mounting system System control and switchgear Vibration isolation Weatherproof housing, sound attenuated
RELATED WORK A.
Refer to the following specifications for related mechanical and electrical considerations: Section 16000 - Electrical Work
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 1
Muskogee Public Schools
1.4
1.5
2014
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
The electric power generating system shall have a site capability as indicated on the Drawings, under continuous operation.
B.
The system shall consist of a natural gas fueled generator set which includes all controls, protection, output circuit breaker, wiring, and accessories for automatic start-stop operation.
C.
The overload capability shall be in excess of this rating, at extreme limits of parameters specified, for not less than 1 hour.
D.
The generator set shall include the capability of automatically controlling generator set operation. After starting, the unit will attain rated speed and voltage, and accept rated load. Generator set speed shall be controlled by the engine governor, while generator output voltage regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator. Manual adjustment of generator speed and voltage shall be provided.
E.
The generator set start-stop sequence shall be initiated manually or automatically by closing or opening of a contact. The control system shall automatically engage the cranking motor, sense engine starting speed, disengage the motor and arm the engine protection circuit.
F.
The set shall immediately shut down in the event of overspeed, low oil pressure, high water temperature and overcrank. Cause of shutdown shall be indicated by a light annunciator. System logic shall prevent restart until fault is cleared. There shall be a provision for manual shutdown in the event of an emergency.
SITE CONDITIONS A.
1.6
Server Safe Room
The operating environment of the power generating system shall be: Altitude 720 ft. Outside temperature, minimum - 20 F Outside Temperature maxaximum 115 F Fuel type Natural Gas
SUBMITTALS A.
Engine-generator submittals shall include the following information: 1. Factory published specification sheet. 2. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets of all auxiliary components such as battery charger, control panel, enclosure, etc. 3. Dimensional elevation and layout drawings of the generator set, enclosure and transfer switchgear and related accessories. 4. Weights of all equipment.
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 2
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
5.
Concrete pad recommendation, layout and stub-up locations of electrical and fuel systems. 6. Interconnect wiring diagram of complete emergency system, including generator, switchgear, day tank, remote pumps, battery charger, control panel, and remote alarm indications. 7. Engine mechanical data, including heat rejection, exhaust gas flows, combustion air and ventilation air flows, fuel consumption, etc. 8. Generator electrical data including temperature and insulation data, cooling requirements, excitation ratings, voltage regulation, voltage regulator, efficiencies, waveform distortion and telephone influence factor. 9. Generator resistances, reactances and time constants. 10. Generator locked rotor motor starting curves. 11. Manufacturer's documentation showing maximum expected transient voltage and frequency dips, and recovery time during operation of the generator set at the specified site conditions with the specified loads. 12. Manufacturer's and dealer's written warranty. B.
Submittals shall include but not be limited to: 1. Component List - A breakdown of all components and options including switch gear. 2. Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data sheet identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including relevant component design and performance data. a. Engine: Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle. Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders. Engine lubricating oil capacity. Engine coolant capacity without radiator. Engine coolant capacity with radiator. Coolant pump external resistance (maximum). Where remote radiator isspecified 3. Generator: Model Model Frame Insulation class Number of Leads Weight, total Weight, rotor Air Flow At rated voltage: Efficiency at 0.8 power factor for: 50% load, 75% load, 100% load Fault current, 3 phase symmetrical Decrement curve 4. Radiator: (High Ambient, Brass) Model Type Coolant capacity, radiator
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 3
Muskogee Public Schools
5.
1.7
Server Safe Room
2014
Coolant capacity, radiator and engine Weight: Dry, Wet System: Dimensions: Length, Width, Height Weight: Dry, Wet Performance in 115°F air, 2400 MSL Continuous power rating at 0.8 power factor (KW) kVA rating Fuel consumption at standard conditions for: 50%, 75% and 100% load Heat rejection to: coolant, after-cooler, exhaust, atmosphere from engine, and atmosphere from generator Exhaust gas stack temperature Exhaust gas components; % NOX, % SO Tons particulate/yr/mo at 50%, 100% load Verification of 10% overload capability
B.
Transient response of frequency and voltage for the generator set:
C.
Auxiliary Equipment - Specification or data sheets, including switchgear, spring type vibration isolators.
D.
E.
Drawings - General dimensions drawings showing overall generator set measurements, mounting location, and interconnect points for load leads, fuel, exhaust, cooling and drain lines. Wiring Diagrams - Wiring diagrams, schematics and control panel outline drawings published by the manufacturer in Joint Industrial Council (JIC) format for controls and switchgear showing interconnected points and logic diagrams for use by contractor and Owner.
F.
Warranty Statements - Warranty verification published by the manufacturer.
G.
Service - Location and description of supplier's parts and service facility including parts inventory and number of qualified generator set service personnel.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, GENERAL A.
The power generating system shall conform to the following performance criteria: 1. Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated generator set KW/KVA at the installation site when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all engine-mounted parasitic and external loads such as radiator fans and power generators. 2. The natural gas engine shall be able to deliver rated power when operating on natural gas with industry recognized fuel energy values. 3. Start Time and Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve rated voltage and frequency, and be capable of accepting load within 10 seconds when properly equipped and maintained. 4. Block Load Acceptance - Transient response shall conform to ISO 8528
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 4
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
requirements.
1.8
B.
The power generating system shall satisfy the following performance criteria at site conditions: Total Power Capability as indicated on the Drawings Frequency 60 Hz Voltage 208Y/120 / 3 phase 4 wire Voltage Dip starting Largest Motor sequence 20% Power Factor 0.8 Overload for 1 Hour 10%
C.
The individual generator set shall exhibit the following performance capability: Kohler 48RCL-4P7BX model. Other manufacturer's are Waukesha, Cummings, Onan, Generac, prior approved.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.9
RESPONSIBILITY A.
1.10
Generator set mounted subassemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake system, exhaust outlet fittings, and generator set mounted controls and switchgear shall also be designed, built, and assembled as a complete unit by the engine - generator manufacturer.
PRODUCTION TESTS A.
1.12
The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided among individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely by the primary manufacturer. This includes generating system design, manufacture, test, and having a local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total system.
SUBASSEMBLY AND PACKAGING A.
1.11
The complete power generation system, including engine, generator, and switchgear shall be the product of one manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the production of complete generating systems for at least 10 years. All components shall have been designed to achieve optimum physical and performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated, assembled, and production tested as performed by Kohler, or prior approved systems.
The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the generator set supplied. A certified report of these tests shall be available when requested at the time of the generator set order.
DRAWINGS/SCHEMATICS
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 5
Muskogee Public Schools A.
1.13
1.14
2014
All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set, controls, and switchgear must conform to a common formats of 8 ½” x 11”, 11” x 17” and 24” x 36”.
SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY A.
Generator Set Distributor: 1. The completed engine generator set shall be supplied by the Manufacturer's authorized distributor only via the Contractor.
B.
Requirements, Codes and Regulations: 1. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of NEC and all-applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new, of current production. There shall be one source responsibility for warranty; parts and service through a local representative with factory trained service personnel.
C.
Automatic Transfer Switch: 1. The automatic transfer switch(es) shall be supplied by the Electrical Contractor. The transfer switch and generators shall be completely compatible.
WARRANTY A.
1.15
Server Safe Room
Two Year Standby (ISO 8528-1: ESP) Generator Set Warranty 1. The manufacturer's standard warranty shall in no event be for a period of less than two (2) years from date of initial start-up of the system and shall include repair parts, labor, reasonable travel expense necessary for repairs at the job site, and expendables (lubricating oil, filters, antifreeze, and other service items made unusable by the defect) used during the course of repair. 2. Running hours shall be limited to 500 hours annually for the system warranty by both the manufacturer and servicing distributor. Submittals received without written warranties as specified will be rejected in their entirety.
PARTS AND SERVICE QUALIFICATION A.
Service Facility 1. The engine-generator supplier shall maintain 24-hour parts and service capability within 100 miles of the project site. 2. The distributor shall stock parts as needed to support the generator set package for this specific project. The supplier must carry sufficient inventory to cover no less than 80% parts service within 24hrs and 95% within 48 hours.
B.
Service Personnel 1. The dealer shall maintain qualified factory trained service personnel.
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 6
Muskogee Public Schools C.
1.16
Server Safe Room
2014
Product Support 1. Preventive Maintenance Agreement: The authorized Kohler dealer shall provide a preventive maintenance agreement using qualified factory trained service personnel, for a period of 1-year minimum. 2. The dealer shall provide genuine Kohler parts and filters, shall provide all recommended fluids, dealer labor, travel labor and travel mileage to complete the suggested preventive maintenance as defined in the manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Manual. 3. Extended Service Coverage shall be provided for a period of 5 years, and shall include no deductible. Extended Service Coverage provides for 100 percent of all parts and labor costs for failures due to defects in materials and workmanship to the “as shipped consist” from the factory. All repairs will be performed by factory trained dealer service personnel, and allows for repairer travel and mileage for all repairs up to 8 hours and 320 miles per incident. Allowance for rental unit by same manufacturer of Genset will be included.
MAINTENANCE CONTRACT A.
The generator set supplier shall offer a maintenance and repair contract which guarantees all support costs of the specified system. It shall include routine and 24 hour emergency access to a factory account manager to expedite emergency repairs. This shall be priced during the bid process as an additive bid item.
B.
The contract shall protect the user from parts and labor price increases, and shall provide a refund of residual funds at any time of user dissatisfaction. Optional payment schedules shall include fixed rate throughout the life of the contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
Genset Requirements 1. The generator set shall be Continuous Duty rated at 48.0 ekW, 60 kVA, 1800 RPM, 0.8 power factor, 208 V, 3-Phase, 60 hertz, including radiator fan and all parasitic loads.
2.
Standby Power Rating: Power is available for the duration of an emergency outage Average Power Output = 70% of standby power Load = Varying Typical Hours/Year = 200 Hours Maximum Expected Usage = 500 hours/year Typical Application = Continuous Material and Parts All materials and parts comprising the unit shall be new and unused.
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 7
Muskogee Public Schools
2.2
Server Safe Room
2014
B.
Engine 1. The engine shall be natural gas fueled, four (4) cycle, water-cooled, while operating with nominal speed not exceeding 1800 RPM. 2. The engine will utilize in-cylinder combustion technology, as required, to meet applicable EPA non-road mobile regulations and/or the EPA NSPS rule for stationary reciprocating compression ignition engines. Additionally, the engine shall comply with the State Emission regulations at the time of installation/commissioning. Actual engine emissions values must be in compliance with applicable EPA emissions standards per ISO 8178 – D2 Emissions Cycle at specified ekW / bHP rating. 3. Utilization of the “Transition Program for Equipment Manufacturers” (also known as “Flex Credits”) to achieve EPA certification is not acceptable. The incylinder engine technology must not permit unfiltered exhaust gas to be introduced into the combustion cylinder. Emissions requirements / certifications of this package: EPA T3
C.
Engine Governing 1. The engine governor shall be a electronic Engine Control Module (ECM) with 24-volt DC Electric Actuator. 2. The ECM shall be enclosed in an environmentally sealed, die-cast aluminum housing which isolates and protects electronic components from moisture and dirt contamination. 3. Speed droop shall be adjustable from 0 (isochronous) to 10%, from no load to full rated load. Steady state frequency regulation shall be +/- 6 RPM. 4. Speed shall be sensed by a magnetic pickup off the engine flywheel ring gear. A provision for remote speed adjustment shall be included. 5. The ECM shall adjust fuel delivery according to exhaust smoke, altitude and cold mode limits. 6. In the event of a DC power loss, the forward acting actuator will move to the minimum fuel position.
GENERATOR A.
Generator Specifications 1. The synchronous three phase generator shall be a single bearing, self-ventilated, drip-proof design in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and directly connected to the engine flywheel housing with a flex coupling. 2. The generator shall meet performance class G2 of ISO 8528. The Permanent Magnet Excitation system shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% (250% for 50Hz) of rated current based on the 125C (Class H) or 105C (Class F) rise rating for ten seconds during a fault condition and shall improve the immunity of the voltage regulator to non-linear distorting loads. 3. The excitation system shall be of brushless construction and be independent of main stator windings (either permanent magnet or auxiliary windings).
B.
Voltage Regulator 1. Digital Voltage Regulator
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 8
Muskogee Public Schools
2.
C.
2.3
2014
The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall be fully integrated into the controller. The regulator shall maintain generator output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load between no load and full load. The regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS in three phases of alternator output voltage, or operating in single phase sensing mode. The voltage regulator shall include a VAR/Pf control feature as standard. The regulator shall provide an adjustable dual slope regulation characteristic in order to optimize voltage and frequency response for site conditions. The voltage regulator shall include standard the capability to provide generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and reactive differential compensation. The voltage regulator shall communicate with the Generator Control Panel via a J1939 communication network with generator voltage adjustments made via the controller keypad. Additionally, the controller shall allow system parameter setup and monitoring, and provide fault alarm and shutdown information through the controller. A PC-based user interface shall be available to allow viewing and modifying operating parameters in a windows compatible environment.
Motor Starting 1. Provide locked rotor motor starting capability of ___ skVA at 30% instantaneous voltage dip as defined per NEMA MG 1. Sustained voltage dip data is not acceptable.
Circuit Breaker A.
2.4
Server Safe Room
Circuit Breaker Specifications 1. Provide a generator mounted 100% circuit breaker, molded case, 3 pole, NEMA 1/IP22. Breaker shall utilize a solid state trip unit. 2. The breaker shall be UL/CSA Listed and connected to engine/generator safety shutdowns. Breaker shall be housed in an extension terminal box which is isolated from vibrations induced by the generator set. Mechanical type lugs, sized for the circuit breaker feeders shown on drawing, shall be supplied on the load side of breaker.
Controls Generator Set Mounted (EMCP 4.4) A.
Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set control. The control panel shall be designed and built by the engine manufacturer. The control shall provide all operating, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control panel shall provide real time digital communications to all engine and regulator controls via SAE J1939.
B.
Environmental The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following environmental conditions: 1. 40C to +70C Operating Range 2. 100% condensing humidity, 30C to 60C
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 9
Muskogee Public Schools 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Server Safe Room
2014
IP22 protection for rear of controller; IP55 when installed in control panel 5% salt spray, 48 hours, +38?C, 36.8V system voltage Sinusoidal vibration 6G's RMS, 24-1000Hz Electromagnetic Capability (89/336/EEC, 91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC, 93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2) Shock: withstand 15G
C.
Functional Requirements The following functionality shall be integral to the control panel. 1. The control shall include a minimum 5.5 inch, 480 x 320 pixel, white backlit graphical display with text based alarm/event descriptions. 2. The control shall include a minimum of 6-line data display 3. Generator set overview screen displaying critical generator set mechanical and electrical data on a single screen. 4. Audible horn for alarm and shutdown with horn silence switch 5. Standard ISO labeling 6. Multiple language capability 7. Remote start/stop control 8. Local run/off/auto control integral to system microprocessor 9. Cooldown timer 10. Speed adjust 11. Lamp test 12. Emergency stop push button 13. Voltage adjust 14. Voltage regulator V/Hz slope - adjustable 15. Password protected system programming
D.
Digital Monitoring Capability The controls shall provide the following digital readouts for the engine and generator. All readings shall be indicated in either metric or English units
E.
ENGINE 1. Engine oil pressure 2. Engine oil temperature 3. Engine coolant temperature 4. Engine RPM 5. Battery volts 6. Engine hours 7. Engine crank attempt counter 8. Engine successful start counter 9. Service maintenance interval 10. Real time clock 11. Engine exhaust stack temperature 12. Engine main bearing temperature
F.
Generator 1. Generator AC volts (Line to Line, Line to Neutral and Average)
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 10
Muskogee Public Schools 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. G.
H.
Server Safe Room
2014
Generator AC current (Avg and Per Phase) Generator AC Frequency Generator kW (Total and Per Phase) Generator kVA (Total and Per Phase) Generator kVAR (Total and Per Phase) Power Factor (Avg and Per Phase) Total kW-hr Total kVAR-hr % kW % kVA % kVAR Generator bearing temperature Generator stator winding temperature
Voltage Regulation 1. Excitation voltage 2. Excitation current Alarms and Shutdowns 1. The control shall monitor and provide alarm indication and subsequent shutdown for the following conditions. All alarms and shutdowns are accompanied by a time, date, and engine hour stamp that are stored by the control panel for first and last occurrence.
I.
Engine Alarm/Shutdown 1. Low oil pressure alarm/shutdown 2. High coolant temperature alarm/shutdown 3. Loss of coolant shutdown 4. Overspeed shutdown 5. Overcrank shutdown 6. Emergency stop shutdown 7. Low coolant temperature alarm 8. Low battery voltage alarm 9. High battery voltage alarm 10. Control switch not in auto position alarm 11. Battery charger failure alarm
J.
Generator Alarm/Shutdown 1. Generator over voltage 2. Generator under voltage 3. Generator over frequency 4. Generator under frequency 5. Generator reverse power (real and reactive) 6. Generator overcurrent 7. Generator current balance
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 11
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
K.
Voltage Regulator Alarm/Shutdown 1. Loss of excitation alarm/shutdown 2. Instantaneous over excitation alarm/shutdown 3. Time over excitation alarm/shutdown 4. Rotating diode failure 5. Loss of sensing 6. Loss of PMG
L.
Maintenance All engine, voltage regulator, control panel and accessory units shall be accessible through a single electronic service tool. The following maintenance functionality shall be integral to the generator set control 1. Engine running hours display 2. Service maintenance interval (running hours or calendar days) 3. Engine crank attempt counter 4. Engine successful starts counter 5. 40 events are stored in control panel memory 6. Chronological status event log capable of displaying a sequence of event leading up to a generator set shutdown 7. Programmable cycle timer that starts and runs the generator for a predetermined time. The timer shall use 7 user-programmable sequences that are repeated in a 7day cycle. Each sequence shall have the following programmable set points: a. Day of week b. Time of day to start c. Duration of cycle
M.
Remote Communications 1. The control shall include Modbus TCP communications via Ethernet 10BASE-T and Modbus RTU communications via RS-485 half duplex with configurable baud rates from 2.4k to 57.6k.
N.
Remote Monitoring Software The control shall provide Monitoring Software with the following functionality 1. Monitor up to eight (8) generator sets, plus ATS and UPS. 2. Provide access to all date and events on generator set communications network 3. Provide remote control capability for the generator set(s) 4. Ability to communicate via Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU or remote modem
O.
Local and Remote Annunciation Local Annunciator (NFPA 99/110, CSA 282): Provide a local, control panel mounted, annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1. 1. Annunciators shall be networked directly to the generator set control 2. Local Annunciator shall include a lamp test pushbutton, alarm horn and alarm acknowledge pushbutton
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 12
Muskogee Public Schools 3.
Server Safe Room
Provide the following individual diagnostics a. Overcrank b. Low coolant temperature c. High coolant temperature warning d. High coolant temperature shutdown e. Low oil pressure warning f. Low oil pressure shutdown g. Overspeed h. Low coolant level i. EPS supplying load j. Control switch not in auto k. High battery voltage l. Low battery voltage m. Battery charger AC failure n. Emergency stop o. Spare p. Spare
light
2014 indications for protection and
P.
Remote Annunciator (NFPA 99/110, CSA 282) Provide a remote annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1. 1. The annunciator shall provide remote annunciation of all points stated above and shall incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent alarms will sound the horn. 2. Ability to be located up to 4000 ft from the generator set
Q.
Sequence of Operations 1. Upon loss of utility, the automatic transfer switch(es) (ATS) shall send a group start signal to the generator set system. Each generator set in the system shall automatically start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. The first generator set to reach rated speed and voltage shall automatically close its circuit breaker, energizing the generator bus. At this point, the first priority load add signal shall be enabled, allowing emergency loads to be energized. 2. Each additional generator set in the system shall automatically drive the output voltage, frequency, and phase to match the bus, and close the generator circuit breaker once the conditions have been met. As each subsequent generator is brought on-line, an additional load add signal shall be enabled, allowing additional loads to be added to the bus. 3. Once all generator sets are on-line, the paralleling controller shall actively monitor real (kW) and reactive (kVA) load requirements of the system, and adjust the generator set output to maintain balanced loading. 4. The controller shall also include logic to automatically sequence the generator sets based on the total load requirement of the system. If the load exceeds a minimum reserve kW threshold, additional generator sets will automatically start, synchronize, and close the generator circuit breaker. If the site load falls below a reserve kW threshold, a generator set will automatically unload, open the
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 13
Muskogee Public Schools
5.
2.5
The generator set shall be equipped with a rail-mounted, engine-driven radiator with blower fan and all accessories. The cooling system shall be sized to operate at full load conditions and 110 F* ambient air entering the enclosure. The generator set supplier is responsible for providing a properly sized cooling system based on the enclosure static pressure restriction.
Fuel System 1. Fuel system shall be natural gas provided by the local natural gas utility.
EXHAUST SYSTEM A.
2.8
generator circuit breaker, and shutdown. Once utility power has been restored, the ATS shall remove the group start signal. The generator set will open the generator circuit breaker, and the generator set will enter cooldown mode. At the expiration of the cooldown timer, the generator set shall automatically shutdown.
FUEL SYSTEM A.
2.7
2014
COOLING SYSTEM A.
2.6
Server Safe Room
Silencer 1. A residential grade silencer, companion flanges, and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting properly sized shall be furnished and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Mounting shall be provided by the contractor as shown on the drawings. 3. The silencer shall be mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine nor will exhaust system growth due to thermal expansion be imposed on the engine. 4. Exhaust pipe size shall be sufficient to ensure that exhaust back pressure does not exceed the maximum limitations specified by the engine manufacturer.
STARTING SYSTEM A.
Starting Motor 1. A DC electric starting system with positive engagement shall be furnished. 2. The motor voltage shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer.
B.
Jacket Water Heater 1. Jacket water heater shall be provided and shall be sized to insure that genset will start within the specified time period and ambient conditions.
C.
Batteries 1. Batteries - A lead-acid storage battery set of the heavy-duty diesel starting type shall be provided. 2. Battery voltage shall be compatible with the starting system.
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 14
Muskogee Public Schools D.
2.9
Server Safe Room
2014
Battery Charger 1. Battery Charger - A current limiting battery charger shall be furnished to automatically recharge batteries. 2. The charger shall be dual charge rate with automatic switching to the boost rate when required. 3. The battery charger shall be mounted on the genset package or inside the genset enclosure/room.
ENCLOSURE A. Heavy Duty Weatherproof Enclosure 1.
2.
3.
The complete diesel engine generator set, including generator control panel, engine starting batteries and fuel oil tank, shall be enclosed in a factory assembled, weather protective enclosure mounted on the fuel tank base. A weather resistant enclosure of steel with electrostatically applied powder coated baked polyester paint. It shall consist of a roof, side walls, and end walls. Fasteners shall be either zinc plated or stainless steel. Handles shall be key lockable, all doors keyed alike, and hinges shall be zinc die cast or stainless steel. Access doors shall be hinged and can be lifted off after opening 90 degrees. Intake openings shall be screened to prevent the entrance of rodents or pests. Lube oil and coolant drains shall be extended to the exterior of the enclosure and terminated with drain valves. Cooling fan and charging alternator shall be fully guarded to prevent injury and prevent flying projectiles from breeching the fins.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
3.2
START UP AND TESTING A.
3.3
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, the project drawings and specifications, and all applicable codes. Owner shall be responsible for installation.
Coordinate all start-up and testing activities with the Engineer and Owner. After installation is complete and normal power is available, the manufacturer's local dealer shall perform the following: 1. Perform a 4 hour load bank test at a 1.0 PF at full nameplate rating. Loadbank, cables and other equipment required for this test to be supplied by the genset supplier.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.
Provide two (2) sets of operation and maintenance manuals covering the generator, switchgear, and auxiliary components. Include final as-built wiring interconnect
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 15
Muskogee Public Schools
Server Safe Room
2014
diagrams and recommended preventative maintenance schedules. 3.4
TRAINING A.
3.5
On-Site Training 1. Provide on-site training to instruct the owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. Review operation and maintenance manuals, parts manuals, and emergency service procedures.
REMOTE SYSTEM MONITORING AND DATA MANAGEMENT A.
Remote Monitoring and Data Management There shall be a monitoring and data management system available on a 24/7/365 basis, which interfaces with the asset (generator set, switchgear, etc.) via a serial and/or direct I/O connection.
B.
The system shall monitor the asset continually. 1. It will provide automated alarm notification via alphanumeric pager, cellular phone and/or e-mail.These alarms will also be displayed by a web-based system which will be updated automatically. 2. Asset functions being monitored will be displayed by a web-based system which will be updated automatically. 3. Standard reports which can be created by the user from the web-based system shall include: a. Site Run Summary report that shows key items associated with generator set runs including the start/stop time and the run duration all within a user defined timeframe. b. Alarm History report that shows a table listing alarms/events, their change in status, time-stamped within a user defined timeframe. The web-based software shall be secure, requiring a registered user name and password structure for access. 1. The system will allow for the aggregation of multiple assets and/or sites to be viewed on one display and/or report. 2. General operations assistance shall be available 24/7/365, by trained personnel via a direct toll-free phone call. 3. All data from site shall be uploaded to a centralized database. 4. The centralized database shall be capable of storage and on-line access of data for at least 13 months. 5. The centralized database shall have a hot backup to ensure access to data is not lost and that Operations Center functions may continue in the event of a server outage. 6. The system will offer the user the option of having alarms and/or events handled by trained Operations Center personnel on a 24/7/365 basis. 7. The trained Operations Center personnel shall follow a user-defined procedure for handling alarms and/or events.
C.
End of Section
Natural Gas Fueled Package Generator Set
16620 - 16
